3HAC047136 PM IRC5-en

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 344

ROBOTICS

Product manual
IRC5
Trace back information:
Workspace 22A version a7
Checked in 2022-02-28
Skribenta version 5.4.005
Product manual
IRC5
Design 14

Document ID: 3HAC047136-001


Revision: W

© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.


Specifications subject to change without notice.
The information in this manual is subject to change without notice and should not
be construed as a commitment by ABB. ABB assumes no responsibility for any errors
that may appear in this manual.
Except as may be expressly stated anywhere in this manual, nothing herein shall be
construed as any kind of guarantee or warranty by ABB for losses, damage to persons
or property, fitness for a specific purpose or the like.
In no event shall ABB be liable for incidental or consequential damages arising from
use of this manual and products described herein.
This manual and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without ABB's
written permission.
Keep for future reference.
Additional copies of this manual may be obtained from ABB.
Original instructions.

© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.


Specifications subject to change without notice.
Table of contents

Table of contents
Overview of this manual ................................................................................................................... 9
Product documentation .................................................................................................................... 14
Network security ............................................................................................................................... 16

1 Safety 17
1.1 Safety information ............................................................................................. 17
1.1.1 Limitation of liability ................................................................................. 17
1.1.2 Safety data ............................................................................................. 18
1.1.3 Requirements on personnel ...................................................................... 21
1.2 Safety signals and symbols ................................................................................. 22
1.2.1 Safety signals in the manual ...................................................................... 22
1.2.2 Safety symbols on controller labels ............................................................ 24
1.3 Robot stopping functions .................................................................................... 27
1.3.1 Protective stop and emergency stop ........................................................... 27
1.3.2 About emergency stop ............................................................................. 29
1.3.3 Enabling device and hold-to-run functionality ............................................... 30
1.4 Robot operating modes ...................................................................................... 31
1.4.1 About the manual mode ........................................................................... 31
1.4.2 About the automatic mode ........................................................................ 33
1.5 Safety during installation and commissioning ......................................................... 34
1.6 Safety during operation ...................................................................................... 37
1.7 Safety during maintenance and repair ................................................................... 38
1.8 Safety during troubleshooting .............................................................................. 39
1.9 Decommissioning .............................................................................................. 40

2 Installation and commissioning 41


2.1 Overview ......................................................................................................... 41
2.2 Installation activities .......................................................................................... 43
2.3 Transporting and handling .................................................................................. 44
2.3.1 Lifting the controller cabinet ...................................................................... 44
2.3.2 Unpacking the controller ........................................................................... 45
2.3.3 The unit is sensitive to ESD ....................................................................... 47
2.4 On-site installation ............................................................................................ 48
2.4.1 Required installation space, IRC5 Controller ................................................ 48
2.4.2 Bolting down the controller ....................................................................... 49
2.4.3 Transportation screws .............................................................................. 50
2.4.4 Mounting the FlexPendant holder ............................................................... 51
2.5 Connections ..................................................................................................... 55
2.5.1 Connectors on the controller ..................................................................... 55
2.5.2 Connecting cables to the controller ............................................................. 57
2.5.3 Power supply system requirements ............................................................ 64
2.5.4 Connecting power supply to the controller ................................................... 67
2.5.5 Connecting the manipulator to the controller ................................................ 73
2.5.6 Connecting safety signals ......................................................................... 74
2.5.7 Connection of external safety relay ............................................................. 76
2.5.8 Closing the Automatic Stop circuit .............................................................. 77
2.5.9 Connection of the MOTORS ON/MOTORS OFF circuit .................................. 78
2.5.10 Connection to MOTORS ON/MOTORS OFF contactor .................................... 84
2.5.11 Connecting a FlexPendant ........................................................................ 86
2.5.12 Using the hot plug option .......................................................................... 88
2.5.13 Connectors on the computer unit ............................................................... 91
2.5.14 Connecting a serial channel to the controller ................................................ 95
2.5.15 Programmable stop functions .................................................................... 97
2.5.16 Connection of drive module ...................................................................... 100
2.5.17 Connection of Drive Module Disconnect, by limit switch ................................. 102
2.5.18 Connection of servo disconnect, by servo power switch ................................. 106

Product manual - IRC5 5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
Table of contents

2.5.19 Connecting a Limit switch override push button ............................................ 108


2.6 Drive system .................................................................................................... 111
2.6.1 Drive functions, general ............................................................................ 111
2.6.2 Configuration of the drive system ............................................................... 112
2.7 Memory functions .............................................................................................. 115
2.7.1 Memory functions .................................................................................... 115
2.7.2 Connecting a USB memory ....................................................................... 116
2.8 I/O system ....................................................................................................... 118
2.8.1 Definition of fieldbuses, IRC5 .................................................................... 118
2.8.2 Scalable I/O devices ................................................................................ 122
2.8.3 DeviceNet I/O units .................................................................................. 124
2.8.4 Conveyor tracking module ........................................................................ 126
2.9 Installation of add-ons ........................................................................................ 128
2.9.1 Installation of external operator's panel, IRC5 ............................................... 128
2.9.2 Installation of external enabling device ........................................................ 132
2.9.3 Installation of Scalable I/O devices ............................................................. 134
2.9.4 Installation of DeviceNet I/O, Gateways and encoder interface units, IRC5 ......... 137
2.9.5 Installation of conveyor tracking module ...................................................... 139
2.9.6 Installation of cooling fan harness axis 1 and 2 ............................................. 142
2.9.7 Installation of the option Hot plug ............................................................... 145
2.9.8 Installing the EPS board DSQC 646 for Electronic Position Switches ................ 149
2.9.9 Installing the SafeMove board DSQC 647 .................................................... 155
2.9.10 Installing the Safety module DSQC1015 for SafeMove .................................... 163
2.9.11 Installation of DispensePac support ............................................................ 174
2.9.12 Installation of additional drive units ............................................................. 175
2.9.13 Installation of additional Drive Module ......................................................... 182
2.9.14 Process module ...................................................................................... 183
2.9.15 Installation of drive system fans with temperature sensors .............................. 186
2.10 Testing ............................................................................................................ 192

3 Maintenance 193
3.1 Maintenance schedule, controller IRC5 ................................................................. 193
3.2 Inspection activities ........................................................................................... 195
3.2.1 Inspection of the controller ........................................................................ 195
3.3 Changing/replacing activities ............................................................................... 197
3.3.1 Replacement of moist dust filter ................................................................. 197
3.4 Cleaning activities ............................................................................................. 200
3.4.1 Cleaning of the controller cabinet ............................................................... 200
3.4.2 Cleaning moist dust filter .......................................................................... 201
3.4.3 Cleaning the FlexPendant ......................................................................... 203
3.5 Function tests ................................................................................................... 205
3.5.1 Function test of earth fault breaker F4 ......................................................... 205
3.5.2 Function test of emergency stop ................................................................ 206
3.5.3 Function test of mode switch ..................................................................... 207
3.5.4 Function test of three-position enabling device ............................................. 208
3.5.5 Function test of motor contactors K42 and K43 ............................................ 209
3.5.6 Function test of brake contactor K44 .......................................................... 210
3.5.7 Function test of Automatic Stop ................................................................. 211
3.5.8 Function test of General Stop ................................................................... 212
3.5.9 Function test of superior stop ................................................................... 213
3.5.10 Function test of limit switch ....................................................................... 214
3.5.11 Function test of automatic fuse F1 .............................................................. 215
3.5.12 Function test of reduced speed control ........................................................ 216

4 Repair 217
4.1 Overview ......................................................................................................... 217
4.2 Replacement of panel board ................................................................................ 218
4.3 Replacement of Flange disconnect ....................................................................... 221
4.4 Replacement of I/O units and Gateways ................................................................ 224

6 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
Table of contents

4.5 Replacement of backup energy bank .................................................................... 226


4.6 Replacement of heat exchange unit and fan ........................................................... 228
4.7 Replacement of computer unit ............................................................................. 232
4.8 Replacement of PCIexpress boards in the computer unit .......................................... 236
4.9 Replacement of expansion board in the computer unit ............................................. 240
4.10 Replacement of fieldbus adapter in the computer unit .............................................. 243
4.11 Replacement of fan in computer unit ..................................................................... 248
4.12 Replacement of SD-card memory in computer unit .................................................. 251
4.13 Replacement of drive units .................................................................................. 254
4.14 Replacement of Axis computer ............................................................................ 257
4.15 Replacement of EPS board DSQC 646 for Electronic Position Switches ...................... 259
4.16 Replacement of SafeMove board DSQC 647 ........................................................... 263
4.17 Replacement of Safety module DSQC1015 for SafeMove .......................................... 267
4.18 Replacement of Remote Service box .................................................................... 270
4.19 Replacement of Contactor Interface Board ............................................................. 273
4.20 Replacement of drive system fans ........................................................................ 276
4.21 Replacement of sensors for the drive system fans ................................................... 279
4.22 Replacement of transformer unit .......................................................................... 283
4.23 Replacement of brake resistor bleeder .................................................................. 286
4.24 Replacement of Process Interface Board ............................................................... 291
4.25 Replacement of Ethernet switch ........................................................................... 293
4.26 Replacement of power supply .............................................................................. 295
4.26.1 Replacement of power distribution unit ........................................................ 295
4.26.2 Replacement of customer I/O power supply ................................................. 298
4.26.3 Replacement of system power supply ......................................................... 301

5 Decommissioning 305
5.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 305
5.2 Environmental information .................................................................................. 306

6 Reference information 309


6.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 309
6.2 Applicable standards ......................................................................................... 310
6.3 Unit conversion ................................................................................................. 312
6.4 Screw joints ..................................................................................................... 313
6.5 Weight specifications ......................................................................................... 314
6.6 Standard toolkit, IRC5 ........................................................................................ 315
6.7 Lifting accessories and lifting instructions .............................................................. 316

7 Spare parts 317


7.1 Controller parts ................................................................................................. 317
7.2 FlexPendant parts ............................................................................................. 323
7.3 Manipulator cables ............................................................................................ 324
7.3.1 Manipulator cables .................................................................................. 324
7.3.2 Fan cables ............................................................................................. 329
7.3.3 CP/CS Harness ....................................................................................... 330
7.3.4 Cables customer power/customer signal ..................................................... 331
7.3.5 Other customer cables ............................................................................. 334
7.3.6 Additional cables ..................................................................................... 335

8 Circuit diagrams 337


8.1 Circuit diagrams ................................................................................................ 337

Index 339

Product manual - IRC5 7


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
This page is intentionally left blank
Overview of this manual

Overview of this manual


About this manual
This manual contains instructions for:
• installing the controller, mechanically as well as electrically.
• maintenance of the controller.
• mechanical and electrical repair of the controller.

Usage
This manual should be used during:
• installation and preparation work.
• maintenance work.
• repair work.

Who should read this manual?


This manual is intended for:
• installation personnel.
• maintenance personnel.
• repair personnel.

Prerequisites
Maintenance/repair/installation personnel working with an ABB Robot must:
• be trained by ABB and have the required knowledge of mechanical and
electrical installation/repair/maintenance work.

References

Reference Document ID
Operating manual - Emergency safety information 3HAC027098-001
Operating manual - IRC5 with FlexPendant 3HAC050941-001
Operating manual - RobotStudio 3HAC032104-001
Operating manual - Getting started, IRC5 and RobotStudio 3HAC027097-001
Operating manual - Troubleshooting IRC5 3HAC020738-001
Application manual - MultiMove 3HAC050961-001
Application manual - Force Control 3HAC050377-001
Application manual - SafeMove1 3HAC050974-001
Application manual - Electronic Position Switches 3HAC050996-001
Application manual - Functional safety and SafeMove2 3HAC052610-001
Technical reference manual - RAPID Instructions, Functions and 3HAC050917-001
Data types
Technical reference manual - System parameters 3HAC050948-001
Product specification - Controller IRC5 3HAC047400-001
See Circuit diagrams on page 337.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 9
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
Overview of this manual
Continued

Note

The document numbers that are listed for software documents are valid for
RobotWare 6. Equivalent documents are available for RobotWare 5.

Revisions

Revision Description
- First edition.
Released with the new computer unit, DSQC1000.
A • Added information on how to replace the fan in the computer unit, see
Replacement of fan in computer unit on page 248.
• Corrected the spare parts list for controller system parts, see Controller
parts on page 317.
• Added information on how to install an additional drive module, see
Installation of additional Drive Module on page 182.
• Added information on how to install an additional drive unit, see Install-
ation of additional drive units on page 175.
• Added the IRB 1520 manipulator cables to the spare parts list, see
Manipulator cables on page 324.
B • Added the MultiMove switch to the spare parts list, see Controller parts
on page 317.
• Article numbers for manipulator cables, IRB 120 added, see Manipu-
lator cables on page 324.
• Article number for DeviceNet Slave (DSQC 1004) changed. See
Definition of fieldbuses, IRC5 on page 118
• Added information about labels on the controller, see Safety symbols
on controller labels on page 24.
• Minor corrections.
C • New computer unit, DSQC1018, with two PCI slots and no knockout
plates. No functional change, but affects illustrations.
• Added new section, Additional cables on page 335, with drive module
cables.
• Added section Process module on page 183.
• Clarified the use of the WAN port in section Connectors on the com-
puter unit on page 91.
D • Some changes on how the ports can be configured and used is de-
scribed in section Connectors on the computer unit on page 91.
E Release 15.2.
• Minor corrections.
• Added safety-related information related to mode switch keys, Install-
ation of external enabling device on page 132, Function tests on page 205,
and Refurbish.
• Updates in section Applicable standards on page 310.
• Added section Safety data on page 18.
• Added section Replacement of sensors for the drive system fans on
page 279. Also some information about the temperature sensors when
replacing MDU and drive system fans.
• Updated picture and table of cables to the hot plug connector in section
Installation of the option Hot plug on page 145.
• System fan removed

Continues on next page


10 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
Overview of this manual
Continued

Revision Description
F Release 16.1.
• Added IRB 1200 and 8700 to lists of robots in different places in the
manual.
• Changed recommended line fusing for some robots at low voltage.
• Added section Installation of drive system fans with temperature
sensors on page 186.
• Simplified procedure in section Replacement of fieldbus adapter in
the computer unit on page 243.
G Release 16.1/RW 6.03.
• Caution about routing cables added in General on page 57.
• Section Connection of drive module on page 100 added.
• Added section Installing the Safety module DSQC1015 for SafeMove
on page 163.
H Release 16.2.
• Added information that function tests should be performed after repla-
cing a component.
• Changes in the article names for some spare parts.
• Updated cable list with revised option numbers in section Cables
customer power/customer signal on page 331.
• Removed section Refurbish.
• Minor corrections.
J Release 17.1.
• Added sections Function test of reduced speed control on page 216,
and About emergency stop on page 29.
• Updated descriptions of stops in section Protective stop and emergency
stop on page 27.
• Updated section Safety data on page 18.
• Updated list of labels in section Safety symbols on controller labels
on page 24.
• New computer unit DSQC1024 is introduced, see Computer unit parts
on page 321.
• Added limitation about SafeMove in section Connection of Drive
Module Disconnect, by limit switch on page 102.
• Minor corrections.
K Release 17.2.
• Updated list of applicable standards.
• Updated section Connecting cables to the controller on page 57.
• Added section Power supply system requirements on page 64.
• Added sections Scalable I/O devices on page 122, Installation of Scal-
able I/O devices on page 134 and Scalable I/O devices on page 320.
• Clarified the existing information in sections DeviceNet I/O units on
page 124 and Installation of DeviceNet I/O, Gateways and encoder in-
terface units, IRC5 on page 137.
• Updated spare parts for bleeders, see Miscellaneous parts on page 322.
• Removed all references to computer unit DSQC1024.
• Minor corrections.
• Updated section Installation of additional Drive Module on page 182.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 11
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
Overview of this manual
Continued

Revision Description
L Release 18.1.
• Added cautions about not using external power in section Installing
the Safety module DSQC1015 for SafeMove on page 163.
• Updated to correct and consistent naming convention: DSQC1015 is
called Safety module.
• Added section FlexPendant parts on page 323.
• Safety section restructured.
• Added section about transformers to Connecting power supply to the
controller on page 67.
• Added information about disposal of storage media.
• Clarified the limitations for Isolated Lan 3 in the section Isolated LAN
3 or LAN 3 as part of the private network (only for RobotWare 6.01 and
later) on page 93.
M Release 18.2.
• Added note in section Connection of ES1/ES2 on panel unit on page 81,
about emergency stop signals for controller with safety module.
• Added information about cables for IRB 120 in section Cables customer
power/customer signal on page 331.
• New computer unit DSQC1024 added, see Computer unit parts on
page 321.
• Added note in section Replacement of SD-card memory in computer
unit on page 251, that SD-card from DSQC1018 cannot be used in
DSQC1024.
N Published in release 19B. The following updates are made in this revision:
• Updated spare parts numbers for manipulator cables.
• New chapters added: Conveyor tracking module on page 126 and In-
stallation of conveyor tracking module on page 139
• Outer dimensions for local I/O units added in section Scalable I/O
devices on page 320.
• Added information in Connecting cables to the controller on page 57.
• Added information about delays on safety inputs in Protective stop
and emergency stop on page 27.
P Published in release 19C. The following updates are made in this revision:
• Added information about FlexPendant cables, see Handling the Flex-
Pendant cables on page 87.
Q Published in release 20B. The following updates are made in this revision:
• Information regarding power supply system requirements has been
improved in sections Isolation transformer on page 65 and Mains line
filter on page 66.
R Published in release 20D. The following updates are made in this revision:
• SD card 3HAC061416-003 that is used with computer DSQC1024 added
in spare part list for Computer unit parts on page 321.
• Article numbers for signal cables updated in Manipulator cables on
page 324.
• Added information that the door must be closed, see Protection class
on page 46.
S Published in release 21A. The following updates are made in this revision:
• Minor corrections in section Connectors on the computer unit on
page 91.
• Local I/O replaced by Scalable I/O in entire manual.
• Information added about China RoHS, see Environmental information
on page 306.
• Spare part numbers corrected for manipulators IRB 1600 and 2400 in
section Manipulator cables on page 324.

Continues on next page


12 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
Overview of this manual
Continued

Revision Description
T Published in release 21B. The following updates are made in this revision:
• Added note about rated voltage and rated current, see Connecting
power supply to the controller on page 67.
• Added a new section on Closing the Automatic Stop circuit, see Closing
the Automatic Stop circuit.
U Published in release 21C. The following updates are made in this revision:
• The reference to the Euromap circuit diagram is updated to new article
number.
• Added IRB 390, see Line fusing on page 68.
• Added information, see AC current in CP/CS on page 58.
• Added new type of residual current circuit breaker (CDH440D), see
Connecting power supply to the controller.
V Published in release 21D. The following updates are made in this revision:
• Caution when connecting motor cooling fan connectors added. See
Installation of cooling fan harness axis 1 and 2.
• Updated safety data.
W Published in release 22A. The following updates are made in this revision:
• Updated information about humidity, see Operating conditions on
page 45 and Storage conditions on page 45.
• Added note about networks and Connected Services, see Isolated
LAN 3 or LAN 3 as part of the private network (only for RobotWare
6.01 and later) on page 93.
• New Ethernet switch, see Replacement of Ethernet switch on page 293.
• Process module installation kit is updated, see Installation kit on
page 184.

Product manual - IRC5 13


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product documentation

Product documentation
Categories for user documentation from ABB Robotics
The user documentation from ABB Robotics is divided into a number of categories.
This listing is based on the type of information in the documents, regardless of
whether the products are standard or optional.

Tip

All documents can be found via myABB Business Portal, www.abb.com/myABB.

Product manuals
Manipulators, controllers, DressPack/SpotPack, and most other hardware is
delivered with a Product manual that generally contains:
• Safety information.
• Installation and commissioning (descriptions of mechanical installation or
electrical connections).
• Maintenance (descriptions of all required preventive maintenance procedures
including intervals and expected life time of parts).
• Repair (descriptions of all recommended repair procedures including spare
parts).
• Calibration.
• Decommissioning.
• Reference information (safety standards, unit conversions, screw joints, lists
of tools).
• Spare parts list with corresponding figures (or references to separate spare
parts lists).
• References to circuit diagrams.

Technical reference manuals


The technical reference manuals describe reference information for robotics
products, for example lubrication, the RAPID language, and system parameters.

Application manuals
Specific applications (for example software or hardware options) are described in
Application manuals. An application manual can describe one or several
applications.
An application manual generally contains information about:
• The purpose of the application (what it does and when it is useful).
• What is included (for example cables, I/O boards, RAPID instructions, system
parameters, software).
• How to install included or required hardware.
• How to use the application.
• Examples of how to use the application.

Continues on next page


14 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product documentation
Continued

Operating manuals
The operating manuals describe hands-on handling of the products. The manuals
are aimed at those having first-hand operational contact with the product, that is
production cell operators, programmers, and troubleshooters.

Product manual - IRC5 15


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
Network security

Network security
Network security
This product is designed to be connected to and to communicate information and
data via a network interface. It is your sole responsibility to provide, and
continuously ensure, a secure connection between the product and to your network
or any other network (as the case may be).
You shall establish and maintain any appropriate measures (such as, but not limited
to, the installation of firewalls, application of authentication measures, encryption
of data, installation of anti-virus programs, etc) to protect the product, the network,
its system and the interface against any kind of security breaches, unauthorized
access, interference, intrusion, leakage and/or theft of data or information. ABB
Ltd and its entities are not liable for damage and/or loss related to such security
breaches, any unauthorized access, interference, intrusion, leakage and/or theft
of data or information.

16 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
1 Safety
1.1.1 Limitation of liability

1 Safety
1.1 Safety information

1.1.1 Limitation of liability

Limitation of liability
Any information given in this manual regarding safety must not be construed as a
warranty by ABB that the industrial robot will not cause injury or damage even if
all safety instructions are complied with.
The information does not cover how to design, install and operate a robot system,
nor does it cover all peripheral equipment that can influence the safety of the robot
system.
In particular, liability cannot be accepted if injury or damage has been caused for
any of the following reasons:
• Use of the robot in other ways than intended.
• Incorrect operation or maintenance.
• Operation of the robot when the safety devices are defective, not in their
intended location or in any other way not working.
• When instructions for operation and maintenance are not followed.
• Non-authorized design modifications of the robot.
• Repairs on the robot and its spare parts carried out by in-experienced or
non-qualified personnel.
• Foreign objects.
• Force majeure.

Spare parts and equipment


ABB supplies original spare parts and equipment which have been tested and
approved. The installation and/or use of non-original spare parts and equipment
can negatively affect the safety, function, performance, and structural properties
of the robot. ABB is not liable for damages caused by the use of non-original spare
parts and equipment.

Product manual - IRC5 17


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
1 Safety
1.1.2 Safety data

1.1.2 Safety data

About this section


This chapter describes the necessary safety data required by standard EN ISO
13849-1:2015.

Prevailing directives and standards


For the use of industrial robots and how to protect personnel from being injured,
special regulations must be fulfilled as described in the following directives and
standards:
• Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC
• EN ISO 10218-1:2011
• EN ISO 13849-1:2008 (when explicitly called forth by EN ISO 10218-1:2011
as ISO 13849-1:2006)
• EN ISO 13849-1:2015

Performance level and category


EN ISO 13849-1, which is a B-standard, describes the general concept of
performance level (PL) and category. Each machine or machinery is potentially
dangerous and can cause personal injury. Based on severity of injury and probability
of accident, when using the machine, a certain level of safety performance, so
called required performance level (PLr) can be defined, where level a represents
the lowest risk and level e the highest. According to this, the machine must be
equipped with safety related parts, meeting the required performance level, to
reduce the risk to accepted low level. As specified in EN ISO 10218-1, normally
PL d is required for robots, but depending on the applications a higher requirement
could be needed if a risk analysis will result in PL e.
To comply with a certain PLr, in this case d, the safety related parts of the robots
and controllers must be structurally designed according to specific structure
categories and using reliable components.
In EN ISO 13849-1 it is in detail specified what category and components data,
which must be met, to fulfill PL d. These are:
• Category 3, which is normally fulfilled using double channels
• MTTFD (Mean Time To dangerous Failure) – high
• DC (Diagnostic Coverage) – low or medium
• CCF (Common Cause Failures) – better than 65 scores according to Annex
F

Performance level for ABB IRC5 controller


To verify that robots and controller comply with at least PL d a self assessment
has been carried out and documented in a Technical Report. The essential
conclusions are accounted for below.
The safety related parts of robot and controller are e.g. the following stop circuits:
• Enabling device
• Emergency stop on operator panel
Continues on next page
18 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
1 Safety
1.1.2 Safety data
Continued

• Emergency stop on FlexPendant


• Limiting robot motion
• Protective stops
• SafeMove
• EPS
• SafeMove2
For the overall design and structure, the category 3 has been verified and meeting
the requirements of CCF.
Each of the stop circuits includes different components like enabling switch, panel
board, contactor board, relays etc. For each of these the MTTFD and DC have been
calculated according to EN ISO 13849-1 Annex C, D and E resulting in the values
as specified in the following table.
See the SISTEMA/ABB FSDT libraries for details of the safety functions.

IRC5 Single and IRC5 Panel Mounted Controller

Safety function Calculated MTTFD DCavg


[years]
Emergency stop inputs 112 Medium
Automatic stop input 120 Medium
General stop input 120 Medium
Superior stop input 120 Medium
Limiting switch input 176 Medium
(without customer connection)
Three-position enabling device inputs 75 Medium
Emergency stop status outputs 263 Medium
lSafeMove (option) (without customer connections) 58 Medium
Electronic Position Switches (option) (without 105 Medium
customer connections)
SafeMove2 functions (option)
Protective stop 370 Low
Emergency stop 370 Low
Emergency stop safe fieldbus output 370 Low
Speed supervision 370 Low
Speed supervision safe fieldbus output 370 Low
Position supervision 370 Low
Position supervision safe fieldbus output 370 Low
External power control 88 Low

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 19
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
1 Safety
1.1.2 Safety data
Continued

Based on the values from the previous table of MTTFD values, the corresponding
PFHD can be calculated using the Annex K, table K1 of EN ISO 13849-1:2008.
These are shown in the following table.

IRC5 Single and IRC5 Panel Mounted Controller

Stop circuit Calculated PFHD PL


Emergency stop inputs 4.29x10E-08 e
Automatic stop input 4.29x10E-08 e
General stop input 4.29x10E-08 e
Superior stop input 4.29x10E-08 e
Limiting switch input 4.29x10E-08 e
(without customer connection)
Three-position enabling device inputs 6.62x10E-08 e
Emergency stop status outputs 4.29x10E-08 e
SafeMove (option) (without customer connections) 1.03x10E-07 d
Electronic Position Switches (option) 4.29x10E-08 e
SafeMove2 functions (option)
Protective stop 1.01x10E-07 d
Emergency stop 1.01x10E-07 d
Emergency stop safe fieldbus output 1.01x10E-07 d
Speed supervision 1.01x10E-07 d
Speed supervision safe fieldbus output 1.01x10E-07 d
Position supervision 1.01x10E-07 d
Position supervision safe fieldbus output 1.01x10E-07 d
External power control 1.35x10E-07 d

Conclusion according to EN ISO 13849-1:2015


The IRC5 controller safety system has a safety category 3 with performance level
PL d according to EN ISO 13849-1 using the simplified method of chapter 4.5.4 of
EN ISO 13849-1 and thus fulfils the safety performance requirement of the robot
safety standard EN ISO 10218-1.
The Common Cause Failure (CCF) is met according to the standard requirements.

20 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
1 Safety
1.1.3 Requirements on personnel

1.1.3 Requirements on personnel

General
Only personnel with appropriate training are allowed to install, maintain, service,
repair, and use the robot. This includes electrical, mechanical, hydraulics,
pneumatics, and other hazards identified in the risk assessment.
Persons who are under the influence of alcohol, drugs or any other intoxicating
substances are not allowed to install, maintain, service, repair, or use the robot.
The plant liable must make sure that the personnel is trained on the robot, and on
responding to emergency or abnormal situations.

Personal protective equipment


Use personal protective equipment, as stated in the instructions.

Product manual - IRC5 21


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
1 Safety
1.2.1 Safety signals in the manual

1.2 Safety signals and symbols

1.2.1 Safety signals in the manual

Introduction to safety signals


This section specifies all safety signals used in the user manuals. Each signal
consists of:
• A caption specifying the hazard level (DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION)
and the type of hazard.
• Instruction about how to reduce the hazard to an acceptable level.
• A brief description of remaining hazards, if not adequately reduced.

Hazard levels
The table below defines the captions specifying the hazard levels used throughout
this manual.
Symbol Designation Significance
DANGER Signal word used to indicate an imminently hazard-
ous situation which, if not avoided, will result in ser-
ious injury.

WARNING Signal word used to indicate a potentially hazardous


situation which, if not avoided, could result in serious
injury.

ELECTRICAL Signal word used to indicate a potentially hazardous


SHOCK situation related to electrical hazards which, if not
avoided, could result in serious injury.

CAUTION Signal word used to indicate a potentially hazardous


situation which, if not avoided, could result in slight
injury.

ELECTROSTATIC Signal word used to indicate a potentially hazardous


DISCHARGE (ESD) situation which, if not avoided, could result in severe
damage to the product.

NOTE Signal word used to indicate important facts and


conditions.

Continues on next page


22 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
1 Safety
1.2.1 Safety signals in the manual
Continued

Symbol Designation Significance


TIP Signal word used to indicate where to find additional
information or how to do an operation in an easier
way.

Product manual - IRC5 23


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
1 Safety
1.2.2 Safety symbols on controller labels

1.2.2 Safety symbols on controller labels

Introduction to safety symbols


Both the manipulator and the controller are marked with labels containing safety
symbols and important information about the product. The purpose of the labels
is to ensure personal safety for all personnel handling the robot, for example during
installation, service, or operation.
The safety symbols are language independent, they only use graphics. The
information labels contain information in text. See Symbols and information on
labels on page 24.

Note

The safety and information labels on the product must be observed.

Symbols and information on labels

Note

The descriptions in this section are generic, the labels can contain additional
information such as values.

Label Description
Read the user manual before use.

xx1400001152

CE label

xx1800000835

UR certified (component)

xx1400002060

Continues on next page


24 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
1 Safety
1.2.2 Safety symbols on controller labels
Continued

Label Description
UL certified (robot with controller)

xx1400002061

Rating label (example)

xx1400001163

Lifting instruction for the IRC5 controller.

xx1400001157

Required installation space.

xx1400001155

Electrical shock

xx1400001151

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 25
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
1 Safety
1.2.2 Safety symbols on controller labels
Continued

Label Description
Disconnect incoming mains before servicing the controller.

xx1400001161

Disconnect incoming mains before servicing the controller


(only for welding equipment).
xx1400001160

Disconnect incoming mains before servicing the controller (for


controllers without UL mains switch).

xx1700000354

High voltage inside the module even if the main switch is in


the OFF position.

xx1400001156

ESD sensitive components inside the controller.

xx1400001162

26 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
1 Safety
1.3.1 Protective stop and emergency stop

1.3 Robot stopping functions

1.3.1 Protective stop and emergency stop

Robot stopping functions


The robot has protective and emergency stop functions (stop category 0 or 1, in
accordance with IEC 60204-1).
Stop category 0 As defined in IEC 60204-1, stopping by immediate removal of
power to the machine actuators.
Stop category 1 As defined in IEC 60204-1, a controlled stop with power avail-
able to the machine actuators to achieve the stop and then re-
moval of power when the stop is achieved.

A stop function, protective or emergency stop, has a default setting for the stop
category, see Inputs to initiate a protective stop or an emergency stop on page 27.
The default stop category for a protective or emergency stop can be re-configured.
Activation of external safety rated devices, connected to the robot controller through
dedicated discrete safety inputs or safety protocols, will initiate these stop functions.

Inputs to initiate a protective stop or an emergency stop

Inputs to initiate a Description Default stop category Stop category recon-


stop function figurable Y/N
Emergency Stop (ES) Input to initiate the Stop category 0 Y
emergency stop func- For deviations, see
tion. The Emergency the product manual
Stop function is initi- for the manipulator.
ated in both automatic
and manual mode.
Automatic Stop (AS) Input to initiate the Stop category 1 Y
protective stop func-
tion Automatic Stop.
The Automatic
Stopfunction is only
initiated in automatic
mode.
General Stop (GS) Input to initiate the Stop category 1 Y
protective stop func-
tion General Stop.
The General
Stopfunction is initi-
ated in both manual
mode and automatic
mode.
Superior Stop (SS) Input to initiate the Stop category 1 Y
superior stop func-
tion. The Superior
Stopfunction is initi-
ated in both manual
mode and automatic
mode.

For example, a safety rated output from a presence sensing device, connected to
AS / GS, a dedicated discrete protective stop input on the robot controller, will

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 27
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
1 Safety
1.3.1 Protective stop and emergency stop
Continued

when the protective stop function is configured as Automatic Stop (AS) initiate the
protective stop function in automatic mode only.
The emergency stop function is a complementary protective measure and shall
not be applied as a substitute for safeguarding measures or safety functions.

Note

For IRC5, a safety input on the panel board that is initiated, must remain active
for at least 1.5 s.

Stop category configuration for IRC5


The stop category for the safety input can be configured, see Technical reference
manual - System parameters.
Safety inputs System paramet- Description
er Function
Emergency Stop SoftES SoftES is used to configure the emergency stop in
automatic and manual mode. The default configuration
is FALSE (stop category 0).
Automatic Stop SoftAS SoftAS can be used to configure the protective stop
in automatic mode either as stop category 0 or cat-
egory 1. The default configuration is TRUE (stop cat-
egory 1).
General Stop SoftGS SoftGS can be used to configure the protective stop
in automatic and manual mode, either as stop category
0 or category 1. The default configuration is TRUE
(stop category 1).
Superior Stop SoftSS SoftSS can be used to configure the protective stop
in automatic and manual mode, either as stop category
0 or category 1. The default configuration is TRUE
(stop category 1).

28 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
1 Safety
1.3.2 About emergency stop

1.3.2 About emergency stop

The emergency stop


The purpose of the emergency stop function is to avert actual or impending
emergency situations arising from the behavior of persons or from an unexpected
hazardous event.
The emergency stop function is to be initiated by a single human action.
The emergency stop function is a complementary protective measure and shall
not be applied as a substitute for safeguarding measures and other functions or
safety functions.
The effect of an activated emergency stop device is sustained until the actuator
of the emergency stop device has been disengaged. This disengagement is only
possible by an intentional human action on the device where the command has
been initiated. The disengagement of the emergency stop device shall not restart
the machinery but only permit restarting.

Note

The emergency stop device on the FlexPendant is operational when the robot
is powered. Indicators to be used to verify that the robot is powered are the main
switch on the cabinet or the LED indicator on the cabinet when robot is in Motors
On Mode.

Recover from emergency stop


1 Inspect the machinery in order to detect the reason for the emergency stop
device actuation.
2 Locate and disengage the emergency stop device or devices that initiated
the emergency stop function.

Product manual - IRC5 29


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
1 Safety
1.3.3 Enabling device and hold-to-run functionality

1.3.3 Enabling device and hold-to-run functionality

Three-position enabling device

CAUTION

The person using the three-position enabling device is responsible to observe


the safeguarded space for hazards due to robot motion and any other hazards
related to the robot.
The three-position enabling device is located on the FlexPendant. When
continuously held in center-enabled position, the three-position enabling device
will permit robot motion and any hazards controlled by the robot. Release of or
compression past the center-enabled position will stop the robot motion.

CAUTION

For safe use of the three-position enabling device, the following must be
implemented:
• The three-position enabling device must never be rendered inoperational
in any way.
• If there is a need to enter safeguarded space, always bring the FlexPendant.
This is to enforce single point of control.

Hold-to-run function in manual high speed mode


The hold-to-run function for manual high speed allows movement in conjunction
with the three-position enabling device when the button connected to the function
is actuated manually. This hold-to-run function can only be used in manual high
speed mode. In case of hazard, release or compress the three-position enabling
device.
How to use the hold-to-run function for manual high speed mode is described in
the operating manual for the controller.

Note

The manual high speed mode is not available in all markets.

30 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
1 Safety
1.4.1 About the manual mode

1.4 Robot operating modes

1.4.1 About the manual mode

The manual mode


Manual mode is a control state that allows for the direct control by an operator.
The operator will through positioning the three-position enabling device to the
center-position allow for movement of the manipulator.
There are two manual modes:
• Manual reduced speed
• Manual high speed (optional)

Safeguard mechanisms
• Protective stop through
- Three-position enabling device (release of or compression past the
center-enabled position)
- General Stop, GS

The mode manual reduced speed


The mode manual reduced speed, is used for jogging, teaching, programming and
program verification of the robot; it may be the mode selected when performing
some maintenance tasks.
In manual reduced speed mode the movement of the TCP is limited to 250 mm/s.
In addition, there is a limitation on the maximum allowed speed for each axis.
Manual control of the robot from inside the safeguarded space shall be performed
through the FlexPendant.

WARNING

Wherever possible, the manual mode of operation shall be performed with all
persons outside the safeguarded space.

Tasks normally performed in mode manual reduced speed


The following tasks are normally performed in manual reduced speed mode.
• Set or reset I/O signals
• Creating and editing RAPID programs
• Modify system parameter values
• Starting, stepping, and stopping program execution
• Jog the manipulator
• Teach or tune programmed manipulator positions

The mode manual high speed


The mode manual high speed, is used for program verification only.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 31
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
1 Safety
1.4.1 About the manual mode
Continued

The three-position enabling switch must be pressed to the center-position and the
hold-to-run button must be pressed to allow start of program execution, for example,
execute movement instructions.
In manual high speed, the initial speed of the movement, does not exceed 250
mm/s, that is limited to a percentage of the programmed speed. The speed can be
manually adjusted in steps up to the programmed speed.
When the three-position enabling device is released or fully compressed, the speed
is reset to the initial speed, that is, not exceeding 250 mm/s.

WARNING

Wherever possible, the manual mode of operation shall be performed with all
persons outside the safeguarded space.

Tasks normally performed in mode manual high speed


The following tasks are normally performed in manual high speed mode.
• Program verification
• Setting program pointer (to Main, to routine, to cursor, to service routine,
etc.)
• Starting and stopping program execution
• Stepping program execution
• Manually adjusting speed (0–100%)

32 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
1 Safety
1.4.2 About the automatic mode

1.4.2 About the automatic mode

The automatic mode


Automatic mode is an operating mode in which the robot operates in accordance
with the task program(s) and therefore not in manual control by an operator.

Tasks normally performed in automatic mode


The following tasks are typically performed in automatic mode:
• Start and stop of program execution.
• Increase or decrease the speed in between zero and programmed speed.
• Restore backups. Only possible when robot is at stop.
• Load, start, stop, and modify RAPID programs through remote clients.

Safeguard mechanisms
• Protective stop through
- Automatic Stop, AS
- General Stop, GS
- Superior Stop, SS

Note

Prior to allowing the robot control system to operate in automatic mode, ensure
that any suspended safeguards are returned to full functionality.

Product manual - IRC5 33


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
1 Safety
1.5 Safety during installation and commissioning

1.5 Safety during installation and commissioning

National or regional regulations


The integrator of the robot system is responsible for the safety of the robot system.
The integrator is responsible that the robot system is designed and installed in
accordance with the safety requirements set forth in the applicable national and
regional standards and regulations.
The integrator of the robot system is required to perform a risk assessment.

Layout
The robot integrated to a robot system shall be designed to allow safe access to
all spaces during installation, operation, maintenance, and repair.
If robot movement can be initiated from an external control panel then an emergency
stop must also be available.
If the manipulator is delivered with mechanical stops, these can be used for reducing
the working space.
A perimeter safeguarding, for example a fence, shall be dimensioned to withstand
the following:
• The force of the manipulator.
• The force of the load handled by the robot if dropped or released at maximum
speed.
• The maximum possible impact caused by a breaking or malfunctioning
rotating tool or other device fitted to the robot.
The maximum TCP speed and the maximum velocity of the robot axes are detailed
in the section Robot motion in the product specification for the respective
manipulator.
Consider exposure to hazards, such as slipping, tripping, and falling.
Hazards due to the working position and posture for a person working with or near
the robot shall be considered.
Hazards due to noise emission from the robot needs to be considered.
Consider hazards from other equipment in the robot system, for example, that
guards remain active until identified hazards are reduced to an acceptable level.

Allergenic material
See Environmental information on page 306 for specification of allergenic materials
in the product, if any.

Securing the robot to the foundation


The robot must be properly fixed to its foundation/support, as described in the
respective product manual.
When the robot is installed at a height, hanging, or other than mounted directly on
the floor, there will be additional hazards.

Continues on next page


34 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
1 Safety
1.5 Safety during installation and commissioning
Continued

Electrical safety
Incoming mains must be installed to fulfill national regulations.
The power supply wiring to the robot must be sufficiently fused and if necessary,
it must be possible to disconnect it manually from the mains power.
The power to the robot must be turned off with the main switch and the mains
power disconnected when performing work inside the controller cabinet. Lock and
tag shall be considered.
Hazards due to stored electrical energy in the controller must be considered.
Harnesses between controller and manipulator shall be fixed and protected to
avoid tripping and wear.
Wherever possible, power on/off or rebooting the robot controller shall be performed
with all persons outside the safeguarded space.

Note

Use a CARBON DIOXIDE (CO2) extinguisher in the event of a fire in the robot.

Safety devices
The integrator is responsible for that the safety devices necessary to protect people
working with the robot system are designed and installed correctly.
When integrating the robot with external devices to a robot system:
• The integrator of the robot system must ensure that emergency stop functions
are interlocked in accordance with applicable standards.
• The integrator of the robot system must ensure that safety functions are
interlocked in accordance with applicable standards.

Other hazards
A robot may perform unexpected limited movement.

WARNING

Manipulator movements can cause serious injuries on users and may damage
equipment.
The risk assessment should also consider other hazards arising from the
application, such as, but not limited to:
• Water
• Compressed air
• Hydraulics
End-effector hazards require particular attention for applications which involve
close human collaboration with the robot.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 35
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
1 Safety
1.5 Safety during installation and commissioning
Continued

Verify the safety functions


Before the robot system is put into operation, verify that the safety functions are
working as intended and that any remaining hazards identified in the risk
assessment are mitigated to an acceptable level.

36 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
1 Safety
1.6 Safety during operation

1.6 Safety during operation

Automatic operation
Verify the application in the operating mode manual reduced speed, before changing
mode to automatic and initiating automatic operation.

Lock and change of operating mode


To prevent hazard, it is the responsibility of the integrator to make sure that keys
used to lock or change the operating mode are handled only by authorized
personnel.
An IRC5 controller with a physical key for the mode selector, is designed so that
the key fits on all IRC5 controllers, unless unique keys are ordered.

Safety devices not in use


Safety devices that are not connected to the robot or robot system cannot initiate
a protective or emergency stop. These must be stored out of sight so that they
cannot be mistaken for being in use.

Product manual - IRC5 37


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
1 Safety
1.7 Safety during maintenance and repair

1.7 Safety during maintenance and repair

General
Corrective maintenance must only be carried out by personnel trained on the robot.
Maintenance or repair must be done with all electrical, pneumatic, and hydraulic
power switched off, that is, no remaining hazards.
Never use the robot as a ladder, which means, do not climb on the controller,
manipulator, including motors, or other parts. There are hazards of slipping and
falling. The robot might be damaged.
Make sure that there are no loose screws, turnings, or other unexpected parts
remaining after work on the robot has been performed.
When the work is completed, verify that the safety functions are working as
intended.

Hot surfaces
Surfaces can be hot after running the robot, and touching these may result in burns.
Allow the surfaces to cool down before maintenance or repair.

Hazards related to batteries


Under rated conditions, the electrode materials and liquid electrolyte in the batteries
are sealed and not exposed to the outside.
There is a hazard in case of abuse (mechanical, thermal, electrical) which leads
to the activation of safety valves and/or the rupture of the battery container. As a
result under certain circumstances, electrolyte leakage, electrode materials reaction
with moisture/water or battery vent/explosion/fire may follow.
Do not short circuit, recharge, puncture, incinerate, crush, immerse, force discharge
or expose to temperatures above the declared operating temperature range of the
product. Risk of fire or explosion.
Operating temperatures are listed in Operating conditions on page 45.
See safety instructions for the batteries in Material/product safety data
sheet - Battery pack (3HAC043118-001).

Related information
See also the safety information related to installation and operation.

38 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
1 Safety
1.8 Safety during troubleshooting

1.8 Safety during troubleshooting

General
When troubleshooting requires work with power switched on, special considerations
must be taken:
• Safety circuits might be muted or disconnected.
• Electrical parts must be considered as live.
• The manipulator can move unexpectedly at any time.

DANGER

Troubleshooting on the controller while powered on must be performed by


personnel trained by ABB or by ABB field engineers.
A risk assessment must be done to address both robot and robot system specific
hazards.

Related information
See also the safety information related to installation, operation, maintenance, and
repair.

Product manual - IRC5 39


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
1 Safety
1.9 Decommissioning

1.9 Decommissioning

General
See section Decommissioning on page 305.

40 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.1 Overview

2 Installation and commissioning


2.1 Overview

General
The ABB IRC5 controller has all components in one cabinet.

xx1300000607

Note

When replacing a unit in the controller, report the following data to ABB, for both
the replaced unit and the replacement unit:
• the serial number
• article number
• revision
This is particularly important for the safety equipment to maintain the safety
integrity of the installation.

Wrist strap button


The location of the wrist strap button is shown in the following illustration.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 41
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.1 Overview
Continued

A Wrist strap button

42 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.2 Installation activities

2.2 Installation activities

Prerequisites
The following section details the main steps on how to unload, transport, install,
and connect the IRC5 controller

Overview of the installation

Action Detailed in
1 Unpack the IRC5 controller. How to lift, unpack and transport the IRC5
controller is detailed in section Lifting the
controller cabinet on page 44 and Unpack-
ing the controller on page 45
2 Install the IRC5 Controller. Bolting down the controller on page 49
3 Connect the manipulator to the IRC5 con- Connecting the manipulator to the control-
troller. ler on page 73
4 Connect power supply to the IRC5 control- Connecting power supply to the controller
ler. on page 67
5 Connect the FlexPendant to the IRC5 Connecting a FlexPendant on page 86
controller.
6 Install the safety functions, for example, Connection of the MOTORS ON/MOTORS
the emergency stop. OFF circuit on page 78
Connection of external safety relay on
page 76
Closing the Automatic Stop circuit on
page 77
7 Miscellaneous connections. How to connect buses, for example Devi-
ceNet, is detailed in the respective applic-
ation manual.
How to connect I/O units to the IRC5 con-
troller is detailed in section Installation of
DeviceNet I/O, Gateways and encoder in-
terface units, IRC5 on page 137.
How to connect a PC to the controller is
described in manual Operating manual - Ro-
botStudio .
How to connect to a network is detailed in
section Connectors on the computer unit
on page 91.
8 Install add-ons (optional). Installation of add-ons on page 128
9 When the installation is complete, perform
the function tests in section Function tests
on page 205 to verify that the safety fea-
tures work properly.

Product manual - IRC5 43


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.3.1 Lifting the controller cabinet

2.3 Transporting and handling

2.3.1 Lifting the controller cabinet

Lifting device
Use the two lifting eyes or a fork lift when lifting the IRC5 controller, as shown
below.
The following figure shows the maximum angle between the lifting straps when
lifting the controller. The weight of the controller module is detailed in section
Unpacking the controller on page 45.

xx0500001847

44 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.3.2 Unpacking the controller

2.3.2 Unpacking the controller

General
Read the safety regulations and other instructions before unpacking the controller,
see Safety on page 17.
The installation must be done by qualified installation personnel and should conform
to all national and local codes.
When unpacking the cabinet, inspect that it was not damaged during transport.

Note

If the controller is going to be stored before unpacking and installation, read the
following information regarding storage conditions.

Storage conditions
The table below shows the recommended storage conditions for the IRC5 controller:
Parameter Value
Min. ambient temperature -25°C (-13°F)
Max. ambient temperature +55°C (+131°F)
Max. ambient temperature (short periods, +70°C (+158°F)
max 24 h)

After storage, the operating conditions inside the controller must be met for at least
6 hours before switching on the controller (see Operating conditions on page 45).
The robot controller shall only be stored indoors, in an environment that is dry and
dust-free. In addition, wind, temperature fluctuations, and condensation shall be
avoided.

Operating conditions
The table below shows the allowed operating conditions for the IRC5 controller:
Parameter Value
Min. ambient temperature 0°C (32°F)
Max. ambient temperature +45°C (113°F)
Max. ambient temperature (option) +52°C (125.6°F)

Note

The humidity conditions shall apply with the environmental conditions EN


60721-3-3, climatic class 3K3. For temperatures 0-30°C, the relative humidity
must not exceed 85%. For temperatures exceeding 30°C, the absolute humidity
must not exceed 25g/m 3 .
If the environmental conditions in EN 60721-3-3, climatic class 3K3, are not
possible to meet at the installation site, desiccant bags can be placed inside the
controller to achieve corresponding conditions. The desiccant bags must be
replaced regularly to maintain approved operating conditions.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 45
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.3.2 Unpacking the controller
Continued

Weight of controller
The table below shows the weight for the IRC5 controller:
Controller Part Weight
IRC5 Complete controller max. 150 kg
Extra drive module 100-130 kg

Protection class
The table below shows the protection classes for the IRC5 controller and the
FlexPendant:
Equipment Protection class
IRC5 controller electronics IP54
IRC5 controller air cooling ducts IP33
FlexPendant IP54

The cabinet must be closed and sealed when no internal access is required.
If the cabinet is not properly closed and sealed (door and cable grommets), it does
not comply with the protection class (IP54) and may affect the following:
• The electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is affected
• Units inside the cabinet are exposed to dust or moisture. Especially important
in cases with high heat and humidity, or much pollution.

Note

To comply with IP54, all openings to the controller cabinet must be sealed. This
includes unconnected connectors which must be fitted with covers.

46 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.3.3 The unit is sensitive to ESD

2.3.3 The unit is sensitive to ESD

Description
ESD (electrostatic discharge) is the transfer of electrical static charge between two
bodies at different potentials, either through direct contact or through an induced
electrical field. When handling parts or their containers, personnel not grounded
may potentially transfer high static charges. This discharge may destroy sensitive
electronics.

Safe handling
Use one of the following alternatives:
• Use a wrist strap. The wrist strap button is located inside the controller.
Wrist straps must be tested frequently to ensure that they are not damaged
and are operating correctly.
• Use an ESD protective floor mat.
The mat must be grounded through a current-limiting resistor.
• Use a dissipative table mat.
The mat should provide a controlled discharge of static voltages and must
be grounded.

Wrist strap button


The location of the wrist strap button is shown in the following illustration.

A Wrist strap button

There is an additional wrist strap button on the main computer.

Product manual - IRC5 47


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.1 Required installation space, IRC5 Controller

2.4 On-site installation

2.4.1 Required installation space, IRC5 Controller

Dimensions
The figure below shows the required installation space for the IRC5 controller.

xx0500001848

Note

The free space on the right hand side of the controller is required to allow opening
the door a full 180° and to access the optional moist dust filter.

Note

The air distance 300 mm on the back of the controller is required to allow
inspection and replacement of the optional moist dust filter and ensure proper
cooling.

Note

Do not place customer cables over the moist dust filters on the back of the
controller. This makes it difficult to inspect and replace the moist dust filters.

48 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.2 Bolting down the controller

2.4.2 Bolting down the controller

Bolt pattern
The figure below shows the bolt pattern for the IRC5 controller. The diameter of
the four bolt holes are 14 mm.

xx0500001853

Product manual - IRC5 49


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.3 Transportation screws

2.4.3 Transportation screws

General
During transportation the connector cover is secured with two screws. The two
screws must be removed before removal of the plate and connection of cables.
The screws are located as shown in the illustration below.

xx0500002038

50 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.4 Mounting the FlexPendant holder

2.4.4 Mounting the FlexPendant holder

Location
The placement of the FlexPendant holder is shown in the illustration below.

xx0500002542

A FlexPendant holder mounted on top of the control cabinet.


B FlexPendant holder mounted on the control cabinet door.

Note

In order to avoid drop of the FlexPendant from high levels, the location of the
FlexPendant holder on top of the control cabinet is recommended only with one
single cabinet without additional drive modules. Otherwise according to location
on the control cabinet door.

Note

Do not position the FlexPendant holder so that it is an obstacle in the place of


work.

Required equipment

Equipment Note
Standard tool kit The contents are defined in section, Standard
toolkit, IRC5 on page 315
FlexPendant holder For spare parts, see Miscellaneous parts on
page 322.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 51
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.4 Mounting the FlexPendant holder
Continued

Procedure - On top of the control cabinet


The following procedure details how to mount the FlexPendant holder on top of
the control cabinet.
Action Note/illustration
1 Remove the protective liner from the tape.

xx0500002546

2 Press the mounting plate with FlexPendant


holder against the top of the control cabinet.

Note

The surface must be clean and dry.

3 Mount the cable bracket holder on the side of


the cabinet.
Use one of the existing M8 screws.

xx0700000240

• A: Cable bracket holder


4 Mount the cable bracket on the cable bracket
holder using enclosed Fastite screws (4 pcs).

xx0700000241

• A: Cable bracket

Continues on next page


52 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.4 Mounting the FlexPendant holder
Continued

Procedure - On the control cabinet door


The following procedure details how to mount the FlexPendant holder on the control
cabinet door.
Action Note/Illustration
1 At assembly of FlexPendant holder on
the mounting plate start with fasten the
Fastite screws (2 pcs) to the mounting
plate.

xx0800000048

• A: Fastite screw (2 pcs)


2 Fasten the two hooks on the mounting
plate with two Fastite screws for each
hook.

xx1100000052

3 Mount the FlexPendant holder and cable


bracket to the mounting plate with the
enclosed Fastite screws (6 pcs).

Note

Remove the metal sheet plate from the


FlexPendant holder before attaching the
holder on to the mounting plate.

xx1700001453

• A: Cable bracket
• B: FlexPendant holder
• C: FlexPendant metal sheet plate

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 53
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.4 Mounting the FlexPendant holder
Continued

Action Note/Illustration
4 Make sure the surface of the cabinet door
is clean and dry.
5 Remove the protective liner from the tape
on the mounting plate.
6 Hitch the hooks around the top of the
cabinet door and then press the mounting
plate against the door.

xx0700000243

54 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.1 Connectors on the controller

2.5 Connections

2.5.1 Connectors on the controller

General
The following section describes the connectors on the front panel of the IRC5
controller.

CAUTION

Always inspect the connector for dirt or damage before connecting it to the
controller. Clean or replace any damaged parts.

Note

It is important that the earth connection point (B) is connected to a ground plane,
in order to avoid disturbance.

Connectors
The following details the connection interface on the IRC5 controller. See also the
circuit diagram, Circuit diagram - IRC5.

xx0500001852

Description Reference on the cir-


cuit diagram
A Mains connection XP.0
B Earth connection point
C Robot power connection XS.1
D Additional axes power connection XS.7
E Customer power/signals external connection XS.13/XS.5
F Customer options XS.10
G Customer options XS.11
H Customer options XS.12
J Customer safety signals X3

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 55
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.1 Connectors on the controller
Continued

Description Reference on the cir-


cuit diagram
K Network connection XS.28
L Additional axes SMB connection XS.41
M Robot SMB connection XS.2

56 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.2 Connecting cables to the controller

2.5.2 Connecting cables to the controller

General
A good and proper electrical installation of the robot system is necessary to ensure
the best performance and prolong the lifetime of the whole robot system.
This section includes important information on how to connect cables and signals
to the controller.

Signal classes
Different rules apply to the different classes when selecting and laying cables.
Signals from different classes must not be mixed.
Signal class Description
Power signals Supplies external motors and brakes.
Class 4 (noisy) Applies to the cables associated with the power inputs and outputs
of variable speed drives. Cables carrying strongly interfering signals
such as motor cables, DC-link load sharing, unsuppressed inductive
loads, DC motors, welding equipment, etc.
Control signals Digital operating and data signals (digital I/O, protective stop, etc.).
Class 3 (slightly Applies to cables carrying slightly interfering signals: AC power
noisy) supply (<1 kV), DC power (24 V), power to equipment with RFI/EMI
filters, control circuits with resistive or suppressed inductive loads
(such as contactors and solenoids), direct-on-line induction motors,
etc.
Measurement signals Analog measurement and control signals (resolver and analog I/O).
Class 2 (slightly sens- This class covers ordinary analogue signals such as analogue sig-
itive) nals (4-20 mA, 0-10V, or signals below 1 MHz), low-speed digital
signals (RS232, RS485), digital (on/off) signals, limit switches, en-
coders, etc.
Data communication Gateway (fieldbus) connection, computer link.
signals Applies to cables carrying very sensitive signals. Signals with a full-
Class 1 (sensitive) scale range less than 1 V or 1 mA, and/or a source impedance >1
kOhm, and/or a signal frequency >1 Mhz. For example high-speed
digital communication (Ethernet), thermocouples, thermistors, strain
gauges and flowmeters.

Selecting cables
All cables laid in the control cabinet must be capable of withstanding 70°C. In
addition, the following rules apply to the cables of certain signal classes:
Signal class Cable type
Power signals Shielded cable with an area of at least 0.75 mm² or AWG 18.
Control signals Shielded cable.
Measurement signals Shielded cable with twisted pair conductors.
Data communication Shielded cable with twisted pair conductors. A specific cable
signals should be used for field bus connections and Ethernet, according
to the standard specification of the respective bus.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 57
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.2 Connecting cables to the controller
Continued

Note

Any local standards and regulations concerning insulation and area must always
be complied with.

AC current in CP/CS
For specific applications where the correct cable dimensioning can depend on the
relationship between the period of the duty cycle and the thermal time constant of
the cable (for example, starting against high-inertia load, intermittent duty), the
cable manufacturer can provide information.
Country specific norms have to be included.
The wire is not dimensioned to take care of starting motors or transformers.
The following table shows how much AC current can be suppled with a specific
temperature, and the wire size.
Wire size (mm 2 //AWG) AC current
40°C//104F 45°C//113F 50°C//122F 52°C//125.6F
Single wire 0.2//24 4.5 4.1 3.7 3.2
Multi wire 2 pair 0.2//24 3.6 3.3 3.0 2.6
Multi wire 4 pair 0.2//24 2.9 2.7 2.4 2.1
Multi wire 6 pair 0.2//24 2.6 2.3 2.1 1.8
Multi wire 9 pair 0.2//24 2.3 2.0 1.8 1.6
Single wire 0.5//20 7.9 7.2 6.5 5.6
Multi wire 2 pair 0.5//20 6.3 5.8 5.2 4.5
Multi wire 4 pair 0.5//20 5.1 4.7 4.2 3.6
Multi wire 6 pair 0.5//20 4.5 4.1 3.7 3.2
Multi wire 9 pair 0.5//20 4.0 3.6 3.2 2.8
Single wire 0.75//18 9.5 8.6 7.8 6.7
Multi wire 2 pair 0.75//18 7.6 6.9 6.2 5.4
Multi wire 4 pair 0.75//18 6.2 5.6 5.1 4.4
Multi wire 6 pair 0.75//18 5.4 4.9 4.4 3.8
Multi wire 9 pair 0.75//18 4.8 4.3 3.9 3.4
Single wire 1.0//17 11.0 10.0 9.0 7.8
Multi wire 2 pair 1.0//17 8.8 8.0 7.2 6.2
Multi wire 4 pair 1.0//17 7.2 6.5 5.9 5.1
Multi wire 6 pair 1.0//17 6.3 5.7 5.1 4.5
Multi wire 9 pair 1.0//17 5.5 5.0 4.5 3.9
0.75//18 three phase 8.6 7.8 7.1 5.6
1.0//17 three phase 10.3 9.4 8.4 6.7

Continues on next page


58 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.2 Connecting cables to the controller
Continued

Route the cables


Routing of cables shall be done in a professional way.
• Cables of different classes, such as signal cables and power cables, must
not be routed together as the power cables may introduce noise in the signal
cables. The greater the separation distance, the lesser the risk for interference
between the cables.
• Robot controller mains supply input cable and robot power cable should be
separated even though they belong to the same class.
• If crossing cables from different classes, cables should cross at an angle
close to 90 degrees.
• All external cables that are to be connected inside the controller must be
shielded in the chassis before entering the cabinet.
Separation distances can be reduced if e.g. dividers are used between cables
classes. Manufacturers of cable duct systems can provide information on how
reduced separation distances can be achieved using their specific products.
All signals that are sensitive to interference should be routed and strapped along
the right side of the controller cabinet according to the image.

xx1300000853

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 59
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.2 Connecting cables to the controller
Continued

Signal class Cable type


Power signals • These signals generate a lot of interference and must be
laid separate from control, measurement, and communica-
tion signals.
• The shielding must be connected to a paint-free part of the
panel chassis of the cabinet at both ends of the cable. Any
unshielded cable must be as short as possible.
• The manipulator power cables are routed on the floor and
along the left side of the controller cabinet.
• Cables should not be wound up like coils. This could cause
an magnetic field disturbing the signals. There will also be
a risk of overheating depending on the load.
Control signals • These signals are very sensitive to interference. To protect
these signals they should not be laid along with the power
Measurement signals signals.
Data communication • In the cable, each signal must be twisted with a neutral wire.
signals • The shielding must be connected directly to the chassis at
both ends of the cable.

Shielding cables
When peripheral devices are connected to the robot system, a shielded cable is
necessary to reduce coupling of the inner cable conductors to the environment
they pass through.

Shielding cable requirements


• The best method for shielding is to ground the shield at both ends of the
cable, provided the ends grounding are at the same potential.
• If the grounding points have different electric potentials - grounding both
ends will create a ground loop allowing unwanted current to flow in the shield.
In such cases one end grounding may be used. The grounding point should
then be at the robot controller side.
• Cables carrying analog low-level signals is another exception where the
shield should be grounded at only one end.
• Most data network and field bus types have defined grounding topologies.
If such grounding schemes exist, they should be followed.
• In complex interference environments, two-layer shielding may be required.
The inner shield should be grounded at the controller side only end and the
outer shield should be grounded at both ends. The optimum shielding is a
combination of foil and braid screens.
• The best connection is one in which the shielding is extended up to and
makes a solid 360° connection (shown below) with the ground plane or
chassis.

Continues on next page


60 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.2 Connecting cables to the controller
Continued

Shielding example
The below example shows the shielding of a d-type connector:

xx1700001320

A A dimpled connector body makes multiple bonds to the mating connector


body all around its periphery, 360° bonding.
B Metal, or metallized, back shell makes 360° bond to the connector body.
C The cable shield is exposed and 360° clamped to the back shell. A tight fit
is a must.
Many other 360° bonding methods and types of 360° shielded connectors are also
acceptable.

Shield pigtail termination


Shield pigtail termination, as shown below, shall be avoided. If a pigtail connection
cannot be avoided, make it as short as possible.

xx1700001321

Ground and screen connections


The task of the grounding system is twofold - protective and functional. The primary
task is to serve as protective earth (PE) for personal and equipment safety. The
secondary task is to serve as a return path for common mode current.
For further information refer to EN 60204-1 and UL 1740.

Grounding requirements
The controller cabinet ground must come from the mains power supply PE.
• The cross-sectional area of each grounding (PE) conductor must be not less
than 10 mm 2 copper (AWG7) in the IRC5 controller and in the manipulator.
• The grounding cable color shall be green-yellow.
• The ground for the controller cabinet, robot manipulator and peripheral
devices must be the same, preferably an equipotential ground grid (mesh).

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 61
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.2 Connecting cables to the controller
Continued

• Ground connection points must have stable inter-metallic bonding, like screw
fixation. Paint, dirt, rust, and other insulating material must be removed from
the contacting surfaces.
For requirements on the marking of the supply ground connection inside the control
cabinet refer to UL 508C. For further details on how grounding systems should be
designed refer to IEC 61000-5-2. For details of cross-sectional area of PE refer to
IEC 60204-1.

Grounding installation
For information on how to install the ground for the IRC5 controller cabinet, see
Connecting power supply to the controller on page 67.
For information on how to connect protective earth for the manipulator, see the
corresponding product manual.

Examples
The following figure shows 2 examples on how protective earth and the signal
cable screens can be connected:

Control cabinet External unit

Example 1

Example 2

xx1200000960

Example 1:
• Where a good earth connection is available on all units, the best shielding
is obtained by grounding all screens at both ends on all units.
Example 2:
• If the cable is terminated where a good earth connection is not available a
noise suppression capacitor can be used. The screens of the 2 cables must
be connected as shown in the figure, but not connected to the chassis of the
unit.

Continues on next page


62 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.2 Connecting cables to the controller
Continued

Interference elimination
Internal relay coils and other units that can generate interference inside the control
cabinet are neutralized. External relay coils, solenoids and other units must be
clamped in a similar way. The illustration below shows how this can be done.
Note that the turn-off time for DC relays increases after neutralization, especially
if a diode is connected across the coil. Varistors give shorter turn-off times.
Neutralizing the coils lengthens the life of the switches that control them.

+24 V DC 0V

1)

2)

+24 V AC/DC 0V

3)

xx1200000961

1 The diode should be dimensioned for the same current as the relay coil, and
a voltage of twice the supply voltage.
2 The varistor should be dimensioned for the same energy as the relay coil,
and a voltage of twice the supply voltage.
3 When AC voltage is used, the components needs to be dimensioned for >500
V max voltage and 125 V nominal voltage.
The resistor should be 100 Ω, and the capacitor should be 1W 0.1 - 1 µF
(typically 0.47 µF).

Product manual - IRC5 63


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.3 Power supply system requirements

2.5.3 Power supply system requirements

Definition of the power supply system


IEC 60364 defines three different types of mains grounding using the two-letter
codes. These are TN, TT, and IT.
First letter Type of ground connection
T Direct connection of one point to ground.
I Not connected to ground or connected to ground via a high impedance.

Second letter Connection between ground and the device being supplied
T Direct connection of one point to ground.
N Direct connection to neutral at the origin of installation, which is connec-
ted to the ground

In the following section the transformer configuration refers to the transformer


secondary side. Configuration of the transformer primary side is not discussed in
this context.

Recommended power supply systems


The following systems are recommended by ABB:
TN−S system TN−C system
PE and N are separate conductors that are A combined PEN conductor is used as both
connected together only near the transformer. a PE and an N conductor.
L1 L1

L2 L2

L3 L3

N PEN

PE

xx1700001311
xx1700001310

Not recommended power supply systems


The following systems are not recommended by ABB:
TT system (separate ground rods) Resistance grounded secondary system
If this kind of system must be used, the If this kind of system must be used, the
grounding path resistance between ground voltage variations between any line and PE
1 and 2 shall not exceed 0.1 Ohm, for more should not exceed ±10% of the nominal line
information refer to UL1740. voltage, for more information refer to EN
50160.

Continues on next page


64 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.3 Power supply system requirements
Continued

TT system (separate ground rods) Resistance grounded secondary system


L1 L1

L2 L2

L3 L3

N N

xx1700001312 xx1700001313

Not allowed power supply systems


The following systems are not allowed by ABB:
Un-symmetric system IT system (ungrounded secondary)
These transformers provide un-symmetric The voltage between phases and ground is
phase voltages with respect to ground. Inher- undefined and may cause damage to both
ent phase imbalances with respect to ground drive system and mains line filter (if installed).
would put the drive system and mains line
filter (if installed) under unacceptable stress.
L1

L2

L3

xx1700001316
xx1700001317

xx1700001315

xx1700001314

Isolation transformer
A three-phase isolation transformer between the mains supply and the control
cabinet is required for any of the below conditions:
• Not allowed power supply system used, as mentioned in Not allowed power
supply systems on page 65.
• When the mains supply is shared with a pressing machine, frequency
converter, or other large industry equipment that may cause the power supply
characteristics out of standard limits. To some extent, isolation transformers
will filter out harmonics, spikes and surges.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 65
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.3 Power supply system requirements
Continued

For further information refer to regional power supply standards.

Allowed isolation transformer types


The following isolation transformer types are allowed by ABB:
Delta-Wye isolation transformer (△/Y) Wye-Wye isolation transformer (Y /Y)

xx1700001318 xx1700001319

A Primary/input
B Secondary/output

Mains line filter


The IRC5 controller option 129-1 Prepared for CE labelling consists of a mains line
filter (3HAC024322-001) to prevent emissions to the incoming power, ensuring
compliance with EN/IEC 61000-6-4.
A mains line filter in each robot cabinet is required for any of the below conditions:
• Robot system CE-labelling is required.
• Robot system will be installed in an EU country.
Other types of external filters may be used, provided they are approved by regional
standards. For further information refer to regional power supply standards.

66 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.4 Connecting power supply to the controller

2.5.4 Connecting power supply to the controller

Location of power supply connection

xx0500001869

A Cable gland

Rated voltage and current


To find the rated voltage, rated current, and short circuit current rating of the
controller, see the name plate (label) on the side of the cabinet.
The illustration shows an example of the position of the label.

xx0900000273

A Controller name plate

Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) Ampere


UL/CSA 10 kA
EU(IEC) 6.5 kA

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 67
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.4 Connecting power supply to the controller
Continued

Note

The use of three phase power with delta connection (as sometimes used in North
Americas and some Asian countries) voids warranty. If the facility has a substation
with any type of delta connection, a grounded Y-configured transformer must be
installed before the robot controller.

Line fusing
Recommended line fusing, slow-blowing diazed or circuit breaker with trip
characteristic K. Max. fuse 35 A, with options 80 A.
Robot Voltage Rated current
IRB 120, 1200, 140, 1410, 1600, 2400, 2600, 260, at 400-660 V 3x16 A
360, 390, 4400
IRB 120, 1200, 140, 1410, 1600, 2400, 2600, 260, at 200-220 V 3x16 A
360, 390, 4400
IRB 4600, 660, 460, 760, 66XX, 6700, 7600, 8700 at 400-600 V 3x25 A
IRB 660, 66XX, 6700, 760, 7600, 8700 at 200-220 V 3x35 A
IRB 4600, 660, 460, 760, 66XX, 6700, 7600, 8700 at 200-220 V 3x35 A

Note

The label on the robot controller shows the rated voltage, rated current, and rated
short-circuit current, intended for the electrical installation of the product. The
actual power consumption in an application might be lower as it depends on the
actual application.

Transformer
For information about included servo transformer, see Product
specification - Controller IRC5.
Note that not all voltage levels are available for all transformers, but the voltage
tolerance is -15%...+10%.

Note

If another voltage is used than the one specified on the controller name plate,
this should be replaced so the name plate has the correct information.

Prerequisites

Equipment Note
Power supply cable (3-phase)
External earth fault protection (residual current circuit For control cables up to 7m, a
breaker, Class B for frequency converters, 300mA) 30mA earth fault protection can
be used if it is Hager CDH440R,
CDH440D or equal residual cur-
rent circuit breaker.

Continues on next page


68 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.4 Connecting power supply to the controller
Continued

Equipment Note
Standard toolkit The contents are defined in sec-
tion Standard toolkit!
Other tools and procedures may be required. See refer- These procedures include refer-
ences to these procedures in the step-by-step instruc- ences to the tools required.
tions below.
Circuit diagram See Circuit diagrams on page 337.

Connection through a cable gland


The following procedures detail how to connect the mains power to the controller
through a cable gland.
Action Note/illustration
1 Connect power supply from an external Prerequisites on page 68
earth fault protection.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 69
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.4 Connecting power supply to the controller
Continued

Action Note/illustration
2 Fit the cable trough the cable gland and
tighten.

xx0500001870

Parts:
• A: cable gland
• B: rotary switch
• C: cable pipe
• D: grounding point
3 Strip the insulation on the power supply
cable long enough to reach the rotary
switch.
4 Connect the ground cable at the ground- See illustration in step 2.
ing point. Tightening torque, 4.5 Nm.

Continues on next page


70 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.4 Connecting power supply to the controller
Continued

Action Note/illustration
5 Route the phase wires through the pipe See illustration in step 2.
up to the rotary switch.
6 Connect the wires as shown in the illus- For three phase:
tration.

xx0500001882

For single phase:

xx1100000019

For single phase, pin 5 is plugged.

Connection through a connector


The following procedures detail how to connect the mains power to the controller
through a connector.

CAUTION

Always inspect the connector for dirt or damage before connecting it to the
controller. Clean or replace any damaged parts.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 71
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.4 Connecting power supply to the controller
Continued

Action Note/illustration
1 Connect the power cable from the shop
supply to connector XP0 on the front panel
on the controller. M

xx0500001852

Parts:
• A: XP0 Mains power connector

72 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.5 Connecting the manipulator to the controller

2.5.5 Connecting the manipulator to the controller

General
Connect the manipulator and the controller to each other after installing them. The
lists below specify which cables to be used in each application.
All connectors on the controller are shown in section Connectors on the controller
on page 55.

Main cable categories


All cables between the manipulator and the controller are divided into the following
categories:
Cable category Description
Manipulator cables Handles power supply to and control of the
manipulator's motors as well as feedback
from the serial measurement board.
Position switch cables (option) Handles supply to and feedback from any
position switches.
Customer cables (option) Handles communication with equipment fitted
on the manipulator by the customer.
Additional axes cables (option) Handles power supply to and control of the
external axes motors as well as feedback
from the servo system.

These categories above are divided into sub-categories which are specified in
section Manipulator cables on page 324.

Tip

In case duplicate CP/CS harnesses are included on delivery, one can be saved
as a spare part.

Product manual - IRC5 73


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.6 Connecting safety signals

2.5.6 Connecting safety signals

CAUTION

For connection of safety signals, see the circuit diagram for details.

CAUTION

All safety signals are two-channel.

External customer connection


If the cabinet is equipped with the option external customer connection, connect
the connector as shown in the following illustration.

CAUTION

Always inspect the connector for dirt or damage before connecting it to the
controller. Clean or replace any damaged parts.

xx1300000601

A External customer connection of safety signals.

Continues on next page


74 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.6 Connecting safety signals
Continued

Internal customer connection


If the cabinet is not equipped with the option external customer connection, the
signal cables must go though a cable gland and be connected to the panel board
inside the cabinet.

xx1000000141

A Cable gland

Note

The signal cable should be shielded and the shielding connected to the cable
gland, or a ferrite ring should be used around the cable inside the cabinet close
to the cable gland. The same goes for all customer I/O signals.

Related information
Connection of external safety relay on page 76
Connection of the MOTORS ON/MOTORS OFF circuit on page 78

Product manual - IRC5 75


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.7 Connection of external safety relay

2.5.7 Connection of external safety relay

Description
The motor contactors K42 and K43 in the controller can operate with external
equipment if external relays are used.

Connection example
The following figure shows an example of how to connect an external safety relay.

xx0100000246

C Robot 1
D Robot 2
F ES (emergency stop) relay
G External Safety relay
H To other equipment
J Safety gate
K Cell ES (emergency stop)

76 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.8 Closing the Automatic Stop circuit

2.5.8 Closing the Automatic Stop circuit

Closing the Automatic Stop circuit


The controller is shipped with a default configuration so that the automatic stop
circuit is open and the general/superior stop circuit is bypassed (short-circuited).
The system can only work in manual mode.
To enable the controller without any additional/external safety equipment, connect
the safety circuit. To bypass Automatic stop circuit, 3-pole jumpers are enclosed
in bag 3HAC078549-001 with corresponding instruction 3HAC078652-001. See the
circuit diagram, 3HAC024480-011.

Product manual - IRC5 77


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.9 Connection of the MOTORS ON/MOTORS OFF circuit

2.5.9 Connection of the MOTORS ON/MOTORS OFF circuit

Outline diagram
The MOTORS ON/MOTORS OFF circuit is made up of two identical chains of
switches.
The diagram shows one of the chains with the available customer connections,
AS, GS, SS, and ES.

A
E

B C C
D

G F

J &
P S
R T
K

M N

xx0100000174

A ES (emergency stop)
B LS (Limit switch)
C Solid state switches
D Contactor
E Mains
F Drive unit
G Second chain interlock
H GS (general mode safeguarded space stop)
J SS (superior stop, same function as GS)
K AS (Automatic mode safeguarded space stop)
L ED (FlexPendant three-position enabling device)
M Manual mode
N Automatic mode
O Operating mode selector
P RUN

Continues on next page


78 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.9 Connection of the MOTORS ON/MOTORS OFF circuit
Continued

R EN1
S EN2
T Motor

Note

Make sure the polarity is correct and that the voltage is not more than 24 V.

Function of the MOTORS ON/MOTORS OFF circuit


The circuit monitors all safety related equipment and switches. If any of the switches
is opened, the MOTORS ON/MOTORS OFF circuit switches the power to the motors
off.
As long as the two channels of AS, GS, SS, and ES are not in identical state, the
robot will remain in protective stop and MOTORS OFF mode.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 79
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.9 Connection of the MOTORS ON/MOTORS OFF circuit
Continued

Connection of safety chains


The diagram below shows the dual channel safety chain.
The supply from internal 24V and 0 V is displayed. For external supply of GS and
AS check the circuit diagram.

Terminal Location

X5, X6 Control Module


X22, X24 Drive Module

xx0100000166

Technical data per chain


Limit switch Load: 300 mV
Max. voltage drop: 1 V
External connectors Load: 10 mA
Max. voltage drop: 4 V
GS/AS/SS load at 24 V 25 mA
GS/AS/SS closed "1" >18 V
GS/AS/SS open "0" <5V
External supply of GS/AS/SS Max. + 35 VDC
Min. - 35 VDC
GS/AS/SS Filter time 2.0 ms i

Continues on next page


80 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.9 Connection of the MOTORS ON/MOTORS OFF circuit
Continued

Technical data per chain


Max. potential in relation to the 300 V
cabinet earthing and other signal
groups.
Signal class Control signals
i When connecting for example a safety PLC to a safety stop, make sure that the safety check pulses
not exceeds 2.0 ms, otherwise a safety relay must be connected in between. See the following
illustration.

xx0800000130

Connection of ES1/ES2 on panel unit

Note

The diagram below shows the terminals for the emergency circuits for a controller
without safety module (option 996-1). For a controller with a safety module, status
signals for emergency stop can only be read from the safe fieldbus (see
Application manual - Functional safety and SafeMove2).

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 81
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.9 Connection of the MOTORS ON/MOTORS OFF circuit
Continued

The supply from internal 24V (X1:4/X2:8) and 0V (X1:8/X2:4) is displayed. For an
ext. supply, X1:3 / X2:7 is connected to ext. 24V, and X1:7 / X2:3 is connected to
ext. 0V.

24V 0V
B C D
X1:4 X1:3
X1:9

X1:10
X1:8 X1:7
X1:1
ES1
X1:2
24V

X1:6
E
24V
X1:4
X1:5
G
0V 24V
F
B C D
X2:4 X2:3
X2:9

X2:10
X2:8 X2:7

X2:1
ES2
X2:2 0V

X2:6
H
0V
X2:4

X2:5
J

xx0100000191

A Internal
B Ext stop
C FlexPendant
D Cabinet
E ES1 internal
F Run chain 1 top
G Internal
H ES2 internal
J Run chain 2 top
ES1 Emergency stop output 1
ES2 Emergency stop output 2

Technical data
ES1 and ES2 max output voltage 120 VAC or 48 VDC
Continues on next page
82 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.9 Connection of the MOTORS ON/MOTORS OFF circuit
Continued

Technical data
ES1 and ES2 max output current 120 VAC: 4 A
48 VDC L/R: 50 mA
24 VDC L/R: 2 A
24 VDC R load: 8 A
External supply of ES relay 24 VDC ± 10% between terminals X1:3,
7 and X2:7, 3 respectively.

Note

In case of interference, the external sup-


ply must be properly filtered.

Rated current per chain 40 mA


Max. potential in relation to the cabinet earthing 300 V
and other signal groups.
Signal class Control signals

Connection to operating mode selector


The illustration below shows the connection of terminals for customer use.

xx0500002092

A Mode selector

Technical data
Max. voltage 48 VDC
Max. current 4A
Max. potential in relation to the cabinet earthing 300 V
and other signal groups.
Signal class Control signals

Product manual - IRC5 83


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.10 Connection to MOTORS ON/MOTORS OFF contactor

2.5.10 Connection to MOTORS ON/MOTORS OFF contactor

General
This section details connection to the MOTORS ON/MOTORS OFF contactor. To
be used when the customer wants external equipment to follow the robot control.

Location
The MOTORS ON/MOTORS OFF contactor is located on the left hand side in the
controller.

C
D

xx0400001058

A MOTOR ON contactor K42 / K43


B Contactor auxiliary block 33-34
C Brake contactor
D Jumper (3 pcs)
E Contactor interface board

Required equipment
The table below details the required equipment.
Equipment Note
Standard toolkit
Circuit diagram See Circuit diagrams on page 337.

Technical data
The table below shows technical data.
Technical data
Max. voltage 48 VDC
Max. current 4A

Continues on next page


84 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.10 Connection to MOTORS ON/MOTORS OFF contactor
Continued

Technical data
Max. potential in relation to the cabinet earthing 300 V
and other signal groups.
Signal class Control signals

Procedure
Following procedure describes connection to the MOTORS ON/MOTORS OFF
contactor.
Action Info/Illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet, disconnect the mains
power. For more information, see Electrical safety on page 35.

2 Connect the wires to the contactor auxiliary blocks 33-34, accord-


ing to the diagram to the right.

xx0400001231

Product manual - IRC5 85


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.11 Connecting a FlexPendant

2.5.11 Connecting a FlexPendant

Location of FlexPendant connector


The FlexPendant connector on the IRC5 controller is located on the operator’s
panel on the controller, or on an external operator’s panel.

CAUTION

Always inspect the connector for dirt or damage before connecting it to the
controller. Clean or replace any damaged parts.

xx0600002782

L FlexPendant connector (A22.X1)

Connecting a FlexPendant

Action Information
1 Locate the FlexPendant socket connector The controller must be in manual mode. If
on the controller or operator’s panel. your system has the option Hot plug, then
you can also disconnect in auto mode. See
section Using the hot plug option on
page 88.
2 Plug in the FlexPendant cable connector.
3 Screw the connector lock ring firmly by
turning it clockwise.

Continues on next page


86 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.11 Connecting a FlexPendant
Continued

Handling the FlexPendant cables


FlexPendant cables are allowed to be rolled up by hand with a minimum bending
radius of 10 times the cable diameter. This also applies to the extension cable. For
example, if the cable is 9.5 mm then it is allowed to roll it with a radius of 95 mm.
Extension cables are not allowed to be used in chains.

Product manual - IRC5 87


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.12 Using the hot plug option

2.5.12 Using the hot plug option

Hot plug option


The hot plug option makes it possible to:
• Disconnect the FlexPendant from a system in automatic mode and thereby
run the system without a FlexPendant connected.
• Temporarily connect and operate a FlexPendant without interrupting the
application running on the system.

WARNING

Pressing the hot plug button disables the emergency stop button on the
FlexPendant. Only press the hot plug button while connecting or disconnecting
the FlexPendant.

WARNING

A disconnected FlexPendant must always be stored separated from the IRC5


controller!

Connect and disconnect the FlexPendant using the hot plug button
The following procedure describes how to connect or disconnect the FlexPendant
on a system in automatic mode using the hot plug button option.

Note

Do not switch to manual mode (or manual full speed mode) while the system is
running without the FlexPendant. The FlexPendant must be connected when
you switch to automatic mode otherwise you cannot confirm the mode change.

Action Information
1 Make sure that the system is in automatic
mode.
2 Press and hold the hot plug button. A red lamp inside the button indicates when
pressed.

Continues on next page


88 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.12 Using the hot plug option
Continued

Action Information
3 Keep pressing the hot plug button and at
the same time, switch the jumper plug with
the FlexPendant plug.

xx0600002784

A: Hot plug button


B: FlexPendant connector

xx0600002796

Jumper plug
4 Release the hot plug button. Make sure that the button is not stuck in
the actuated position since this disables
the FlexPendant emergency stop button.

Note

When the FlexPendant is disconnected, the jumper plug must be connected in


its place.

Note

If the hot plug button is released while neither the jumper plug, nor the
FlexPendant is connected, the robot movements will be stopped since the
emergency stop chains are opened.

Limitations for messages on the FlexPendant


When using the hot plug option, the following limitations apply to messages on
the FlexPendant:

Operator messages
Some applications may require input from the operator by using the FlexPendant
(e.g. applications using RAPID instructions TPReadNum, UIMsgBox, etc.). If the
application encounters such an operator message, program execution will wait.
After connecting the FlexPendant you must then stop and start the program
execution to be able to see and respond to these messages. They are not displayed
automatically by just connecting the FlexPendant.
If possible, avoid using these types of instructions when programming systems
that are using the hot plug button option.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 89
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.12 Using the hot plug option
Continued

Event log messages


When connecting the FlexPendant, event log messages can be viewed also for
the period when the FlexPendant was disconnected, since these are stored on the
controller.

90 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.13 Connectors on the computer unit

2.5.13 Connectors on the computer unit

Overview of the computer unit


The following illustration shows an overview of the computer unit.

xx1300000608

X1 Power supply
X2 (yellow) Service (connection of PC).
X3 (green) LAN1 (connection of FlexPendant).
X4 LAN2 (connection of Ethernet based options).
X5 LAN3 (connection of Ethernet based options).
X6 WAN (connection to factory WAN).
X7 (blue) Panel unit
X9 (red) Axis computer
X10, X11 USB ports (4 ports)

Note

It is not supported to connect multiple ports of the main computer (X2 - X6) to
the same external switch, unless static VLAN isolation is applied on the external
switch.

Service port test middle


The service port is intended for service engineers and programmers connecting
directly to the controller with a PC.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 91
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.13 Connectors on the computer unit
Continued

The service port is configured with a fixed IP-address, which is the same for all
controllers and cannot be changed, and has a DHCP server that automatically
assigns an IP-address to the connected PC.

Note

For more information about connecting a PC to the service port, see section
Connecting a PC to the controller in Operating manual - RobotStudio.

WAN port
The WAN port is a public network interface to the controller, typically connected
to the factory network with a public IP address provided by the network
administrator.
The WAN port can be configured with fixed IP-address, or DCHP, from the Boot
application on the FlexPendant. By default the IP-address is blank.
Some network services, like FTP and RobotStudio, are enabled by default. Other
services are enabled by the respective RobotWare application.

Note

The WAN port cannot use any of the following IP-addresses which are allocated
for other functions on the IRC5 controller:
• 192.168.125.0 - 255
• 192.168.126.0 - 255
• 192.168.127.0 - 255
• 192.168.128.0 - 255
• 192.168.129.0 - 255
• 192.168.130.0 - 255
The WAN port cannot be on a subnet which overlaps with any of the above
reserved IP-addresses. If a subnet mask in the class B range has to be used,
then a private address of class B must be used to avoid any overlapping. Please
contact your local network administrator regarding network overlapping.
See the section about topic Communication in Technical reference
manual - System parameters.

Note

For more information about connecting a PC to the WAN port, see section
Connecting a PC to the controller in Operating manual - RobotStudio.

LAN ports
The LAN 1 port is dedicated for connecting the FlexPendant.
The LAN 2 and LAN 3 ports are intended for connecting network based process
equipment to the controller. For example field buses, cameras, and welding
equipment.

Continues on next page


92 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.13 Connectors on the computer unit
Continued

LAN 2 can only be used as private network to the IRC5 controller.

Isolated LAN 3 or LAN 3 as part of the private network (only for RobotWare 6.01 and later)
The default configuration is that LAN 3 is configured as an isolated network. This
allows LAN 3 to be connected to an external network, including other robot
controllers. The isolated LAN 3 network has the same address limitations as the
WAN network.

Note

The isolated LAN 3 cannot be used to connect to any HMI device (RobotStudio,
Robot Web Services, or PC SDK client) since it does not support the protocol
needed for communication.

Note

If isolated LAN 3 network is selected, then it may not be possible to use


Connected Services on LAN 3 port, depending on which fieldbus protocol is used
(EtherNet/IP or PROFINET).

Robot Controller

Private Isolated Public


LAN 3

Service LAN 1 LAN 2 LAN 3 WAN

xx1500000393

An alternative configuration is that LAN 3 is part of the private network. The ports
Service, LAN 1, LAN 2, and LAN 3 then belong to the same network and act just
as different ports on the same switch. This is configured by changing the system
parameter Interface, in topic Communication and type Static VLAN, from "LAN 3"
to "LAN". See Technical reference manual - System parameters.

Note

With this alternate configuration it is possible to use Connected Services on LAN


3 as the network is not isolated to one fieldbus protocol.

Robot Controller

Private Public

Service LAN 1 LAN 2 LAN 3 WAN

xx1500000394

Note

For more information and examples of connecting to different networks, see


Application manual - EtherNet/IP Scanner/Adapter or Application
manual - PROFINET Controller/Device.
Continues on next page
Product manual - IRC5 93
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.13 Connectors on the computer unit
Continued

USB ports
The USB ports are intended for connecting USB memory devices.

Note

It is recommended to use the USB ports USB 1 and USB 2 on the X10 connector
for connecting USB memory devices.
The USB ports on the X11 connector are intended for internal use.

94 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.14 Connecting a serial channel to the controller

2.5.14 Connecting a serial channel to the controller

General
The serial channel is an option. To be able to connect a serial channel to the
controller, the main computer needs to be equipped with the expansion board
DSQC1003.
The expansion board has one RS232 serial channel, COM1, which can be used to
communicate with process equipment.
The expansion board also enables the connection of a fieldbus adapter. For more
information on how to connect a fieldbus adapter, see Definition of fieldbuses,
IRC5 on page 118.

Location
The serial channel connector is located on the expansion board in the computer
unit as shown below.

A B

xx1300000610

A COM1
B CONSOLE

Note

The CONSOLE connector is used for debugging purposes only.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 95
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.14 Connecting a serial channel to the controller
Continued

Conversion of the RS232 channel


The RS232 channel can be converted to RS422 full duplex with an optional adapter,
DSQC 615.
The RS422 enables a more reliable point to point communication (differential) over
longer distances, from RS232 = 15m to RS422 = 120m.
Action Info/Illustration
1 Connect the adapter to the serial channel A cable is needed between the serial
connector. channel connector and the adapter.

xx1300000854

A cable
B adapter

96 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.15 Programmable stop functions

2.5.15 Programmable stop functions

Stopping functions
There are different methods to stop the robot, in addition to manually initiated
stops.
• Stop with system input signals
• Stop with RAPID instructions
• Other stops

Stop with system input signals


In the control system, it is possible to define system input signals to be set/reset
through different interactions, for example, through I/O signals. See Application
manual - Controller software IRC5.
The RAPID program cannot be started when any of the system input signals is
high.
Pre-defined system input Description
Stop The RAPID program execution is stopped, and the manipulator
is stopped on path with no deviation. This stop is similar to a
normal program stop using stop button on the FlexPendant.
SoftStop This is a faster stop of the manipulator than Stop. This stop is
more stressing for the mechanics than normal stop, therefore
there might be a minor deviation on path.
QuickStop This is a faster stop of the manipulator than Stop and SoftStop.
This stop is more stressing for the mechanics than normal stop
or SoftStop, therefore there might be a deviation on path.
Stop at End of Cycle Stops the RAPID program when the complete program is ex-
ecuted, that means when the last instruction in the main routine
has been completed.
Stop at End of Instruction Stops program execution after the current instruction is com-
pleted.

All of these stops are performed without using the brakes, and the power is never
disconnected. The program execution can be continued directly, for example by
activating a start signal if the stop signal is set low.

Note

Only safety rated input signals are allowed to be used for safety.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 97
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.15 Programmable stop functions
Continued

Stop with RAPID instructions


There are several RAPID instructions available that stops the robot.
Instruction Description Arguments
SystemStopAction Stops all robots in all tasks imme- \Stop: similar to a normal pro-
diately. gram stop with stop button.
\StopBlock: as above, but to re-
start the PP has to be moved.
\Halt: this is like a category 0
stop, i.e. it will result in motors off
state, stop of program execution
and robot movements in all motion
tasks. The Motors on button must
be pressed before the program
execution can be restarted.
Stop The current move instruction will \NoRegain: the robot will not re-
be finished before the robot stops. turn to the stop point when restar-
A restart will continue the program ted, e.g. after having been jogged
execution. away.
\AllMoveTasks: all robots will be
stopped.
StopMove The current move instruction will \Quick: the stop will be a soft
be stopped immediately as a nor- stop on path, as described for
mal program stop but the program system input SoftStop, otherwise
execution will continue with the similar to a normal program stop.
next instruction. StartMove must \AllMotionTasks: all robots will
be executed to get the robot mov- be stopped.
ing again.
DebugBreak The current move instruction and
the program execution will be
stopped immediately as a normal
program stop. A restart of the pro-
gram will continue the program
execution.
EXIT The current move instruction and
the program execution will be
stopped immediately as a normal
program stop. After stop the Pro-
gram Pointer is lost and has to be
reset to Main.
EXITCYCLE The current move instruction and
program execution will be stopped
immediately. The Program Pointer
will be moved to Main and if run-
ning mode is continuous, the pro-
gram will be restarted.

Continues on next page


98 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.15 Programmable stop functions
Continued

Instruction Description Arguments


SearchX Search instructions can be pro- \Stop: the robot will stop as fast
grammed with arguments to stop as possible. This stop is per-
the robot movement close to the formed by ramping down motion
point where a search hit was no- in each motor separate from each
ticed. The program execution will other, and as fast as possible.
continue with the next instruction. Since it will be without any coordin-
ation, the robot may slide off path
fairly much.
\PStop: the robot will stop like
after a normal program stop.
\SStop: the robot will stop on path
but quicker than a normal program
stop. This is similar to a system
input SoftStop.
\Sup: the robot will continue to the
ToPoint. If more than one search
hit is found, an error will be repor-
ted.

RAPID instructions are described in Technical reference manual - RAPID


Instructions, Functions and Data types.

Other unexpected stops

Type of stop Description


SysFail In the control system there is a surveillance and monitoring
function that can detect abnormal situations. In such cases a
stop will be initiated. The robot controller must be restarted.
Power fail In the control system there is a monitoring function that can
detect power failure. In such cases a stop will be initiated.
Stop at collision In the control system there is a monitoring function that can
detect collisions. In such cases a stop will be initiated.

WARNING

Special care must be taken when restarting a machine that is


stopped due to a collision. The robot might make a limited
move when restarted.

WARNING

The revolution counters might need to be updated after a colli-


sion to ensure path accuracy.

Product manual - IRC5 99


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.16 Connection of drive module

2.5.16 Connection of drive module

General
A controller that handles several robots or an application that requires more than
three external axes needs extra drive modules (one drive module per robot). Up
to four drive modules can be used, including the one assembled in the IRC5
controller.
This manual only describes the connector interface on the drive module. More
information about installation of the drive module with the applications MultiMove
can be found in Application manual - MultiMove.

Note

It is important that the earth connection point (C) is connected to a ground plane,
in order to avoid disturbance.

Connectors
The following details the connectors on the front panel of the drive module.

D E L M

A B C F G H J K
xx0600002931

Description
A Power connection to IRC5 controller
B A4.X0: Mains connection to transformer
C Earth connection point
D A4.X1: Robot power connection
E A4.X7: External axes power connection
F A4.XX: Customer options
G A4.XX: Customer options
H A4.XX: Customer options
J A4.XX: Customer options
K Communication cabling between controller/drive module

Continues on next page


100 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.16 Connection of drive module
Continued

Description
L Communication cabling between controller/drive module
M A4.XS41: Additional axes SMB connection
N A4.XS2: Robot SMB connection

Product manual - IRC5 101


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.17 Connection of Drive Module Disconnect, by limit switch

2.5.17 Connection of Drive Module Disconnect, by limit switch

General
This function enables you to temporarily disconnect a drive module and deactivate
any robot or additional mechanical units connected to this module. The procedures
are detailed below.
It is also possible to connect a remote switch to enable a Drive Module Disconnect.
The required equipment and procedure for connection of a switch are specified
below.

Note

The system diagnostics monitors the connection and disconnection of drive


modules, and event log messages regarding these events will be stored in the
event log when required. These messages are accessible using the FlexPendant
or RobotStudio.

Note

This functionality cannot be used together with SafeMove, option 810-2.

Continues on next page


102 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.17 Connection of Drive Module Disconnect, by limit switch
Continued

Location
The contactor interface board unit is located on the left hand side of the controller
as shown below.

xx1300000855

A Contactor interface board


B Contactors

Required equipment
The table below details the required equipment.
Equipment Note
Wire AWG20
Switch 24V 0.5A
Operating manual - RobotStudio
Operating manual - IRC5 with FlexPendant
Standard toolkit
Circuit diagram See Circuit diagrams on page 337.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 103
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.17 Connection of Drive Module Disconnect, by limit switch
Continued

Enabling Drive Module Disconnect in RobotStudio


The following procedures details how to enable the system for Drive Module
Disconnect.
Action
1 In the Configuration editor in RobotStudio, select the topic Motion.
2 Select the type Drive Module User Data.
3 Set the parameter for selected drive module to YES.
4 Restart the system.

Enabling Drive Module Disconnect with the FlexPendant


The following procedures details how to enable the system for Drive Module
Disconnect.
Action
1 In the Control panel on the FlexPendant, tap Topics, and select Motion.
2 Tap the type Drive Module User Data, and then tap to select the drive module.
3 Set the parameter for selected drive module to YES.
4 Restart the system.

Disconnecting the drive module


Use this procedure to disconnect a drive module.
Action Note/illustration
1 Make sure that the system is in the MO-
TORS_OFF state.
2 Disconnect the connector X22. It is also possible to use connector X21,
but this is typically used for limit switches
on the robot.

xx0500002087

Reconnecting the drive module


Use this procedure to reconnect the drive module.
Action Note/illustration
1 Make sure that the system is in the MO-
TORS_OFF state.

Continues on next page


104 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.17 Connection of Drive Module Disconnect, by limit switch
Continued

Action Note/illustration
2 Reconnect the X22 connector.

xx0500002087

3 Move the program pointer to main in the


RAPID-program where the disconnected
mechanical units are active.

Connect a remote switch


The following procedures details how to connect a remote switch.
Action Note/illustration
1 Make sure that the system is in the MO-
TORS_OFF state.
2 Disconnect the jumpers from the connector
X22.
3 Connect the wires to the connector X22
according to the diagram on the right.

xx0500002091

Product manual - IRC5 105


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.18 Connection of servo disconnect, by servo power switch

2.5.18 Connection of servo disconnect, by servo power switch

General
The IRC5 controller is pre-wired to accept a customer servo disconnect.

Note

Due to risk of voltage drop, the switch to the servo disconnect circuit should not
be mounted more than 50 meters from the Drive Module.

Location
The contactor is found on the left hand side inside the controller as shown below.

C
D

xx0400001058

A MOTOR ON contactor K42 / K43


B Contactor block3
C Brake contactor
D Jumper (4 pcs)
E Contactor interface board

Required equipment
The table below details the required equipment.
Equipment Note
Wire AWG 10, brake AWG 16
Switch 500V 40 A, brake 24V 10A
Standard toolkit
Circuit diagram See Circuit diagrams on page 337.

Continues on next page


106 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.18 Connection of servo disconnect, by servo power switch
Continued

WARNING

It is recommended to also open the 24V to the brake (wire 489) to avoid accidental
release of the brakes when the drive system is disconnected.

Procedure
Following procedure details how to connect a servo disconnect.
Action Note/Illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet,


disconnect the mains power. For more
information, see Electrical safety on
page 35.

2 Remove the four jumpers between con-


tactors R2 and R3
3 Connect the wires according to the dia-
gram on the right.

xx0400001057

• A: MOTOR ON contactor K43


• B: Jumper (4 pcs)
• C: MOTOR ON contactor K42
• D: Wires to external main switch
• E: External switch

Product manual - IRC5 107


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.19 Connecting a Limit switch override push button

2.5.19 Connecting a Limit switch override push button

DANGER

The Limit switch override is used to disconnect safety limitations. Make sure the
Limit switch override function is not active longer than absolutely necessary.
If the option SafeMove is implemented, Limit switch override must never be used
at all. The SafeMove safety controller has its own override function.

General
The override circuit enables the possibility to jog an axis out of a forbidden (limited)
zone.

Limitations
The switch has to be placed inside the controller to eliminate the risk of electrical
noise.

Required equipment

Equipment Art. no Note


Contact block (2 pcs) 3SFA 611 610 R1001 ABB CW Control
Push button (in Dual Cabinet) 1SFA 611 102 R1105 ABB CW Control
Connector X23 3HAC021085-001
Wire Cable AWG 20 Blue
Standard toolkit This is detailed in section
Standard toolkit, IRC5 on
page 315.
Circuit diagram See Circuit diagrams on
page 337.

Note

The parts needs to be ordered separately from ABB and are not part of an option
package.

Procedure
The following procedure details how to connect a Limit switch override circuit in
the controller.
Action Note/illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet,


disconnect the mains power. For more in-
formation, see Electrical safety on page 35.

Continues on next page


108 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.19 Connecting a Limit switch override push button
Continued

Action Note/illustration
2 Attach two additional contact blocks on the
existing push button (Motors on).
A
Note

There is only room for one additional con-


tact block beside the two existing. Therefor,
place one additional block on top of the
other. B

C
D
xx0500002553

• A: Additional contact blocks


• B: Existing contact, lamp blocks
• C: Holder
• D: Push button
3 Connect wires from the contact blocks to
the connector according to the diagram to
the right.

xx0500002556

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 109
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.19 Connecting a Limit switch override push button
Continued

Action Note/illustration
4 Route the wires together with the existing
harness on the left wall.

xx0500002557

• A: Contact blocks
• B: Wires
• C: Connector X23
5 Fit the connector to the X23 connector on
the contactor interface board.

xx0500002087

110 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.6.1 Drive functions, general

2.6 Drive system

2.6.1 Drive functions, general

General
The robot is powered by power electronics found in the IRC5 controller. This also
includes power electronics for driving additional axes.

Standard configurations
The drive system is available in different sizes depending on which robot to drive
and other power requirements.
How the drive system is configured is described in section Configuration of the
drive system on page 112.

Replacing drive system parts


How to replace drive system parts is described in section Replacement of drive
units on page 254.

Installation of additional drive units


How to install additional drive units is described in section Installation of additional
drive units on page 175.

Product manual - IRC5 111


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.6.2 Configuration of the drive system

2.6.2 Configuration of the drive system

General
The IRC5 Controller contains one Main Drive Unit and up to three Additional Drive
Units, and in some cases an Additional Rectifier Unit. The allowed combinations
of these, depending on the robot type, is specified below.

Location
The drive system is located in the controller as shown below.

A B C

D
xx1300000808

A Additional Rectifier Unit (only used for additional axes in combination with small
robots)
B Main Drive Unit MDU-430A (for small robots)
C Main Drive Unit MDU-790A (for large robots)
D Additional Drive Units (for additional axes)

DC bus cables
Between the units are fitted DC bus cables, which are specified below:
Description Art. no. Note
DC bus cable 3HAC032612-001 Between Main Drive Unit MDU-790A and Additional
Drive Units.
DC bus cable 3HAC036612-001 Between Additional Rectifier Unit and first Additional
Drive Unit.
DC bus cable 3HAC036612-002 Between Additional Rectifier Unit and second Addi-
tional Drive Unit.
DC bus cable 3HAC036612-003 Between Additional Rectifier Unit and third Additional
Drive Unit.

Continues on next page


112 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.6.2 Configuration of the drive system
Continued

IRB 120, 1200, 140, 1410, 260, 360, 1600


The following illustration shows the drive units. The table specifies which units
may be fitted in which positions.

en0800000293

Pos. Identification Description Art. no. Note


Y1, Y2, Z1, Z2 DSQC 406 Main Drive Unit 3HAC035301-001
MDU-430A
X1, X2 DSQC 417 Additional Rectifier 3HAC035381-001 Required if any
Unit Additional Drive
ARU-430A Unit is used.

X3 DSQC 664 Additional Drive 3HAC030923-001 For first addition-


Unit al axis
ADU-790A
Y3 DSQC 664 Additional Drive 3HAC030923-001 For second addi-
Unit tional axis
ADU-790A
Z3 DSQC 664 Additional Drive 3HAC030923-001 For third addition-
Unit al axis
ADU-790A

IRB 2400, 2600, 4400, 460, 4600, 660, 6600, 6620, 6640, 6650, 6660, 6700, 760, 7600, 8700*
The following illustration shows the drive units. The table specifies which units
may be fitted in which positions.

en0800000292

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 113
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.6.2 Configuration of the drive system
Continued

Pos. Identification Description Art. no. Note


X1, X2, Y1, Y2, DSQC 663 Main Drive Unit 3HAC029818-001
Z1, Z2 MDU-790A
X3 DSQC 664 Additional drive 3HAC030923-001 For first addition-
unit al axis
ADU-790A
Y3 DSQC 664 Additional drive 3HAC030923-001 For second addi-
unit tional axis
ADU-790A
Z3 DSQC 664 Additional drive 3HAC030923-001 For third addi-
unit tional axis
ADU-790A

* IRB 8700 uses two ADU, in addition to the MDU, for the robot. Therefore, only
one ADU can be used for an additional axis.

114 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.7.1 Memory functions

2.7 Memory functions

2.7.1 Memory functions

General
The controller is fitted with an SD-card memory containing ABB Boot Application
software. The SD-card memory is located inside the computer unit.
For more information on how to replace the SD-card memory, see Replacement
of SD-card memory in computer unit on page 251.

Note

Only use SD-card memory supplied by ABB.

CAUTION

Reformatting the SD-card or modifying the disk partition can cause irreparable
boot-up problems.

Product manual - IRC5 115


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.7.2 Connecting a USB memory

2.7.2 Connecting a USB memory

Handling USB
Handling of USB memory is described in Operating manual - IRC5 with FlexPendant.

Location on FlexPendant
The location of the USB port on the FlexPendant is shown by the following
illustration:

A
xx0900000022

A USB port (located behind rubber cover)

Location on main computer


The location of the USB ports on the main computer is shown by the following
illustration:

A
xx1300000602

A USB ports

Continues on next page


116 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.7.2 Connecting a USB memory
Continued

Note

It is recommended to use the USB ports USB 1 and USB 2 on the X10 connector
for connecting USB memory devices.
The USB ports on the X11 connector are intended for internal use.

Product manual - IRC5 117


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.8.1 Definition of fieldbuses, IRC5

2.8 I/O system

2.8.1 Definition of fieldbuses, IRC5

General
The IRC5 Controller may be fitted with a number of different fieldbus adapters and
fieldbus master/slave boards.
In the standard form, no fieldbus is mounted to the controller.

Fieldbus master/slave boards


On the main computer unit there are slots available for installing a master/slave
board.

B
xx1600000536

A Slot for PCIexpress boards


B Slot for safety module (option SafeMove Pro or SafeMove Basic)

The following master/slave boards are available:


Description Art. no. Type designation
PROFIBUS Master PCIexpress 3HAC044872-001 DSQC1005
DeviceNet Master/Slave PCIexpress 3HAC043383-001 DSQC1006

Continues on next page


118 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.8.1 Definition of fieldbuses, IRC5
Continued

Expansion board for fieldbus adapters


An expansion board needs to be installed to be able to fit a fieldbus adapter. On
top of the main computer unit, there is one slot available for installing the expansion
board.
The expansion board is also equipped with a serial channel. For more information
on how to connect to the serial channel, see Connecting a serial channel to the
controller on page 95.

xx1300000605

A Assembled expansion board for fieldbus adapters, without adapter.

Description Art. no. Type designation


AnybusCC / RS232 expansion 3HAC046408-001 DSQC1003
board

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 119
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.8.1 Definition of fieldbuses, IRC5
Continued

Fieldbus adapters
The fieldbus adapters are inserted into the expansion board on top of the main
computer unit. There is one slot available for installing a fieldbus adapter.

xx1300000604

A Slot for AnybusCC fieldbus adapters

Following fieldbus adapters are available:


Description Art. no. Type designation
AnybusCC DeviceNet slave 3HAC045973-001 DSQC1004
AnybusCC PROFIBUS slave 3HAC026840-001 DSQC 667
AnybusCC Ethernet/IP slave 3HAC027652-014 DSQC 669
AnybusCC PROFINET slave 3HAC031670-001 DSQC 688

References
For more information on how to install and configure the fieldbuses, see the
respective fieldbus manual:
Manual title Art. no.
Application manual - DeviceNet Master/Slave 3HAC050992-001
Application manual - DeviceNet Anybus Slave 3HAC050993-001
Application manual - EtherNet/IP Anybus Adapter 3HAC050997-001
Application manual - EtherNet/IP Scanner/Adapter 3HAC050998-001
Application manual - PROFIBUS Anybus Device 3HAC050965-001
Application manual - PROFIBUS Controller 3HAC050966-001
Application manual - PROFIenergy Device 3HAC050967-001

Continues on next page


120 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.8.1 Definition of fieldbuses, IRC5
Continued

Manual title Art. no.


Application manual - PROFINET Anybus Device 3HAC050968-001
Application manual - PROFINET Controller/Device 3HAC065546-001

Product manual - IRC5 121


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.8.2 Scalable I/O devices

2.8.2 Scalable I/O devices

General
ABB Scalable I/O is a modular, compact, and scalable I/O system that consists of
a base device, which is the minimum configuration, and add-on devices.
Up to four add-on devices can be controlled by each base device with maintained
performance, and any combination of add-on devices is supported.

Communication
The base device communicates over the EtherNet/IP communication protocol to
the robot controller or to other EtherNet/IP scanners. Up to 20 devices in total can
be connected to the robot controller over EtherNet/IP. This includes base devices
and other third-party I/O devices.

Node commissioning for other EtherNet/IP scanners


For other EtherNet/IP scanners, node commissioning needs to be done either using
a dhcp server on the scanner network or setting a static IP address in the device
with the help of third-party software. An initial volatile address can be obtained
using the reset button. The TCP/IP Object can then be accessed for the purpose
of this.

Options
When using the standard Plug & Produce interface, no additional RobotWare
options or hardware options are required to connect to the robot controller.
When using the RobotWare option EtherNet/IP Scanner/Adapter, more configuration
possibilities are available.

Device interfaces
The add-on devices have an optical interface and must be attached to a base
device. The additional Ethernet port on the base device can be used to daisy chain
any Ethernet based equipment on the same network, for example additional base
devices.

Mounting
The I/O devices are designed to be mounted vertically on a mounting rail in an
IP20 protected environment with normal air convention. Forced air is needed if the
devices are mounted horizontally.

Continues on next page


122 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.8.2 Scalable I/O devices
Continued

xx1600002032

Scalable I/O devices and parts


For more information about Scalable I/O device and parts, see Scalable I/O devices
on page 320.

Product manual - IRC5 123


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.8.3 DeviceNet I/O units

2.8.3 DeviceNet I/O units

General
The IRC5 controller may be fitted with DeviceNet I/O or encoder units. These are
configured in an identical way.
The IRC5 controller is prepared for up to four DeviceNet I/O units or encoder
interfaces units. This means that the harness inside the controller is equipped with
necessary connectors. The units are placed on the inside of the door, as shown
in the illustration below.

xx0500001859

A I/O or encoder units


B Mounting rail
C Connection terminal XT31

Standard configuration
In the standard form, no fieldbus is mounted to the controller.
It is possible to connect any type of DeviceNet compliant I/O unit on the DeviceNet
- master bus. All I/O units should comply with the DeviceNet standard and be
conformance tested by ODVA.

DeviceNet I/O units and parts


The table below specifies the DeviceNet I/O units:
Description Note
AD Combi I/O DSQC 651
Digital I/O DSQC 652

See Spare parts on page 317 for the spare part numbers.

Continues on next page


124 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.8.3 DeviceNet I/O units
Continued

Encoder interface units


The table below specifies the encoder interface units:
Description Art. no. Note
Encoder interface unit for conveyor 3HNE 01586-1 DSQC 377B
tracking

Further information
The table below gives references to additional information:
Information: Found in:
How to install the DeviceNet I/O Fit the expansion board and/or field bus adapter ac-
units mechanically and electrically. cording to Replacement of expansion board in the
computer unit on page 240 and/or Replacement of
fieldbus adapter in the computer unit on page 243.
Allowed configurations of Devi- Technical reference manual - System parameters
ceNet I/O units and how to setup
the configurations.
How to install the DeviceNet I/O unit The application manual for the different I/O buses re-
software related in a new system. spectively, see listing in Definition of fieldbuses, IRC5
on page 118.
Detailed descriptions of all available The application manual for the different I/O buses re-
DeviceNet I/O units. spectively, see listing in Definition of fieldbuses, IRC5
on page 118.

Product manual - IRC5 125


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.8.4 Conveyor tracking module
RobotWare - OS

2.8.4 Conveyor tracking module

General
The conveyor tracking module, DSQC 2000 CTM-01, is a network based conveyor
interface that provides connections for 4 encoders and 8 cameras. The camera
connections can also be used for other sensor types, for example photocells. The
module uses network communication to share conveyor speed and position data
with one or more robot controllers.
The IRC5 controller can have one conveyor tracking module (option 1550-1) installed
from delivery, but may also be equipped with 2 extra conveyor tracking modules
(option 1551-1).

A B C
xx1800002637

A Conveyor tracking module


B Connection terminal XT31
C Mounting rail

Encoder interface units


The table below specifies the encoder interface units:
Description Art. no. Note
DSQC2000 CTM-01 3HNA027579-001 Conveyor tracking
module

Continues on next page


126 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.8.4 Conveyor tracking module
RobotWare - OS
Continued

Description Art. no. Note


CONNECTOR KIT - DSQC2000 3HNA029345-001 Connector kit

Note

The connector kit in-


cludes contacts for 2
encoders and 4 camer-
as.
Two connector kits
are needed to handle
additional encoders
and cameras.

Further information
The table below gives references to additional information:
Information: Found in:
How to install and configure Convey- Application manual - Conveyor tracking,
or Tracking. 3HAC050991-001

Product manual - IRC5 127


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.1 Installation of external operator's panel, IRC5

2.9 Installation of add-ons

2.9.1 Installation of external operator's panel, IRC5

Overview
External operator’s panels can be either simply a panel or a panel box. See
illustrations below.

Note

When ordering the external operator's panel as an add-on, the external operator's
panel is delivered empty together with labels and blanking plugs.
When installing, the following components must be moved from the controller
to the external operator's panel:
• Mode switch
• Motor ON button
• Emergency stop button

External operator’s panel (option 733-3)

C D

B
E

A
F

xx1100000522

A Front panel
B FlexPendant connector
C Blanking plug for actuator red
D Emergency stop button
E Motor ON button
F Mode switch

Continues on next page


128 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.1 Installation of external operator's panel, IRC5
Continued

External operator’s panel box (option 733-4)


D
C
E

B
F

A
G

I H
xx1000000954

A Wall cabinet
B Front panel
C Blanking plug for FlexPendant
D Blanking plug for actuator red
E Emergency stop button
F Motor ON button
G Mode switch
H External operator's panel harness
I FlexPendant connector

Required equipment

Equipment Art. no. Note


External operator's panel (733-3) 3HAC040643-003
External operator's panel box (733-4) 3HAC040644-003
External operator's panel cable 3HAC038767-001 7 m
3HAC038768-001 15 m
3HAC038769-001 30 m
Standard toolkit The contents are defined in
section, Standard toolkit,
IRC5 on page 315
Circuit diagram See Circuit diagrams on
page 337.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 129
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.1 Installation of external operator's panel, IRC5
Continued

Procedure
The procedure below details how to install the external control panel.
Action Info/Illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet,


disconnect the mains power. For more in-
formation, see Electrical safety on page 35.

2 Disconnect the cable from the ethernet


connector for FlexPendant on the computer
unit.
3 Disconnect signal cabling from the panel
board unit.
Connectors:
• A21.X9
• A21.X10

xx0500001890

4 Remove the following components together All components will be moved to the ex-
with the attached cable harness: ternal operator's panel, except the Flex-
• S21.1, Mode switch Pendant connector and the cable harness
• S21.2, Motor ON button which can be discarded.
• S21.3, Emergency stop button
• XS4, FlexPendant connector
5 Remove the cover to a free customer con- The illustration below shows the connec-
nector slot on the connection panel. tion panel for the controller.

xx0500001960

• A: Customer connection slot


6 Fit the harness from the external control
panel to the empty slot with the four attach-
ment screws.
7 Connect the earth cable to the chassis.
8 Connect the ethernet connector A31.X3 for
the FlexPendant to the computer unit.
9 Connect the signal connectors A21.X9 and
A21.X10 to the connector X9 and X10 on
the panel board unit.

Continues on next page


130 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.1 Installation of external operator's panel, IRC5
Continued

Action Info/Illustration
10 Strap the cabling to the existing cable
strapping inside the controller.
11 Fit the labels and blanking plugs to the
empty slots on the operator's panel.
12 Fit the following components to the correct
positions on the external operator's panel:
• S21.1, Mode switch
• S21.2, Motor ON button
• S21.3, Emergency stop button
13 Fit the cabling to the panel box with the four
attachment screws.
14 Attach the XS4 connector to the external See Circuit diagrams on page 337.
operator's panel, and connect the free ends
of the harness to the components on the
external operator's panel.
15 Connect the earth cable.
16 Strap the cabling on the external operator's
panel.
17 Power on the controller and test the func-
tionality of the Mode switch, Motor ON
button, and the Emergency stop button.

Product manual - IRC5 131


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.2 Installation of external enabling device

2.9.2 Installation of external enabling device

Overview
IRC5 is delivered with one enabling device but have the possibility to connect one
additional external enabling device (cannot be ordered from ABB Robotics).
When an external enabling device is used together with the three-position enabling
device on the teach pendant, both enabling devices must be enabled to be able
to operate the manipulator in manual mode.

Connecting the external enabling device


The external enabling device must be connected to the panel board connector X6
pin 7-10 as shown in the figure below.

IRC5

Panel board (A21)

Connector X6

External enabling
X6.7 (EN1_1A)
device

X6.9 (EN2_1B)

X6.10 (EN2_1A)

X6.8 (EN1_1B)

xx1500000534

The enabling device chain is enabled if X6 pin 7 is short circuited with X6 pin 8 at
the same time as X6 pin 9 is short circuited with X6 pin 10.

Requirement on the external enabling device


The external enabling device connected to IRC5 must have the following
characteristics:
• Redundant channels.
• Three-position enabling device. When the enabling device is pressed to the
center position the enabling device chain must be enabled. When the enabling
device is released or pressed to third position, the enabling device chain
must be disabled.
• The enabling device must have a B10 value of at least 100000 cycles (less
than 10% chance of failure before 100000 cycles).
• The mean time to dangerous failure (MTTFd) of the external enabling device
must be high enough to ensure that the external enabling device together

Continues on next page


132 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.2 Installation of external enabling device
Continued

with IRC5’s enabling device chain is above 55 years. See safety related
performance for the enabling device chain below.

Performance of IRC5 original enabling device chain


The safety-related performance of the enabling device chain, without the external
enabling device, is as follows:
• MTTFd for IRC5 enabling device chain is 80 years.
• IRC5’s enabling device chain’s calculated average probability of dangerous
failure per hour (PFHd) is 6.62x10E-08.
• IRC5’s enabling device chain’s design and structure is category 3.
• IRC5’s enabling device chain’s Diagnostic Coverage is medium (90% < DCavg
< 99%).
• The Common Cause Failure (CCF) is met according to the standard
requirements.

Product manual - IRC5 133


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.3 Installation of Scalable I/O devices

2.9.3 Installation of Scalable I/O devices

Installation of Scalable I/O base device


The base device to be installed is shown in the illustration below.

xx1600002033

Use this procedure to install the base device.


Action Note
1
DANGER

Before commencing any work inside the cabinet


make sure that the main power has been switched
off.

Continues on next page


134 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.3 Installation of Scalable I/O devices
Continued

Action Note
2 Fit the device by snapping it onto the mounting
rail.

xx1700000275

3 Connect the Ethernet cable from the robot control-


ler, or the EtherNet/IP scanner, to any of the con-
nectors X3 or X5.
4 Connect the logic power supply to connector X4. For information about the pinout,
see Application manual - Scalable
I/O
5 Connect process power supply and GND to the
input and output connectors X1 and X2. CAUTION

Note The process power supply must be


supplied separately. Connecting
The process power supply also powers the optical the process power supply through
interface to the add-ons. the logical power supply connector
may damage the device.

6 Connect wires to the inputs and outputs as re-


quired.
7 Configure the device, see Application manu-
al - Scalable I/O.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 135
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.3 Installation of Scalable I/O devices
Continued

Installation of Scalable I/O add-on device


The add-on devices to be installed and the base device is shown in the illustration
below.

xx1600002032

For more information about installing Scalable I/O add-on devices, please see
Application manual - Scalable I/O.

136 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.4 Installation of DeviceNet I/O, Gateways and encoder interface units, IRC5

2.9.4 Installation of DeviceNet I/O, Gateways and encoder interface units, IRC5

Location
The DeviceNet I/O units, Gateway or encoder interface units to be installed are
shown in the illustration below.

xx0500001859

A I/O units, Gateways or encoder interface units


B Mounting rail
C Connection terminal XT31

Required equipment

Equipment Article number Note


DeviceNet I/O units, Gateways or en-
coder interface units
Application manual - DeviceNet Mas- 3HAC050992-001
ter/Slave
Circuit diagram See Circuit diagrams on
page 337.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 137
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.4 Installation of DeviceNet I/O, Gateways and encoder interface units, IRC5
Continued

Fitting
The procedure below details how to fit the units.
Action Note/Illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet,


disconnect the mains power. For more in-
formation, see Electrical safety on page 35.

2 Fit the DeviceNetI/O unit by snapping it


onto the mounting rail.
3 Connect the DC supply to the board.
4 Connect wires to the inputs and output Described in the Application manual for
connectors as required. the respective busses.

24 V power supply
I/O units are supplied with 24 V power from the connector XT31 (see previous
illustration).

Parallel connection
The 24V coming from DSQC 662, terminal XT31.1, can not be increased by adding
power from any other 24 V power supply (not even DSQC 609). There is no load
levelling function that ensures current distribution. The unit will not be destroyed
but the lifetime may be affected.
The parallel connection of two DSQC 609 is permitted (factory setting) but not more
than two.

138 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.5 Installation of conveyor tracking module
RobotWare - OS

2.9.5 Installation of conveyor tracking module

Location
The conveyor tracking module must be powered by a 24V power supply and
connected to the Ethernet.

B
xx1800002638

A X1, Power inlet 24VDC


B X20, Optional camera power inlet 24VDC
C X7 WAN, Ethernet connection

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 139
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.5 Installation of conveyor tracking module
RobotWare - OS
Continued

A B C
xx1800002637

A Conveyor tracking module


B Connection terminal XT31
C Mounting rail

Required equipment

Equipment Article number Note


DSQC 2000 CTM-01 3HNA027579-001
CONNECTOR KIT - DSQC 2000 3HNA029345-001
Application manual - Conveyor 3HAC050991-001
tracking
Standard toolkit See Standard toolkit, IRC5
on page 315.
Circuit diagram - IRC5 3HAC024480-011

Note

The connector kit includes contacts for 2 encoders and 4 cameras. Two connector
kits are needed to handle additional encoders and cameras.

Continues on next page


140 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.5 Installation of conveyor tracking module
RobotWare - OS
Continued

Fitting
The procedure below details how to fit the units.
Action Note/Illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet,


disconnect the mains power. For more in-
formation, see Electrical safety on page 35.

2
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
(ESD)

The unit is sensitive to ESD. Before hand-


ling the unit read the safety information in
section The unit is sensitive to ESD on
page 47.

3 Fit the conveyor tracking module by snap-


ping it onto the mounting rail.
4 Connect 24VDC power supply from the
XT31 to X1 (power inlet, main functions)
and X20 (optional camera power inlet) on
the conveyor tracking module.
5 Connect the Ethernet cable to the connect- The WAN port of the CTM must be con-
or X7 WAN on the conveyor tracking mod- nected to the same Ethernet network as
ule. the robot controllers.
6 Connect wires to the encoder and camera Described in the Application manual - Con-
connectors as required. veyor tracking.

24V power supply


The unit is supplied with 24V power from the connector XT31 (see previous
illustration).

Parallel connection
The 24V comes from DSQC 609, terminal XT31. There is no load levelling function
that ensures current distribution. The unit will not be destroyed but the lifetime
may be affected.
The parallel connection of two DSQC 609 is permitted (factory setting) but not more
than two.

Product manual - IRC5 141


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.6 Installation of cooling fan harness axis 1 and 2

2.9.6 Installation of cooling fan harness axis 1 and 2

General
If the robot is going to be supplemented with cooling fans on axis 1 and 2 the
controller has to be supplemented with an internal harness.

Locations in controller

xx0600002686

A Harness, cooling - Axis 1 and 2


B Cable protection
C Contactor interface board
D Connector A43.X10
E Connector A43.X11
F Position switch terminals

Required equipment

Equipment Article no. Note


Harness, cooling - Axis 1 and 2 kit 3HAC025488-001
Standard toolkit IRC5 See Standard toolkit, IRC5
on page 315.

Continues on next page


142 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.6 Installation of cooling fan harness axis 1 and 2
Continued

Equipment Article no. Note


Circuit diagram See Circuit diagrams on
page 337.

Procedure
Following procedure details how to install the harness, cooling - Axis 1 and 2 kit
in the controller.
Action Note/Illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet, discon-


nect the mains power. For more information, see
Electrical safety on page 35.

2
WARNING

The unit is sensitive to ESD. Before handling the


unit please read the safety information in the section
The unit is sensitive to ESD on page 47

3 Remove the two sealing plugs.

xx0600002688

• A: Sealing plug
• B: Cover plate with gasket
4 Fit the two connectors XS.8 and XS.58 from the in-
side.
5 Route the cable to the left and connect the harness
connectors to the contactor interface board.
• A43.X11 to X11
• A43.X10 to X10

CAUTION

When connecting the Fan cables, it is important to


consider the keying of the contacts. The locking
mechanism on the cable contacts should be ori-
ented away from the Panel Control Board center.
Connecting this cable the wrong way will result in
xx0600002690
damaged components.

6 Route the wires with terminals to be mounted on


the cabinet door inside the cable protection accord-
ing to the illustration.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 143
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.6 Installation of cooling fan harness axis 1 and 2
Continued

Action Note/Illustration
7 Fit the snap locking terminals to the plate on the
cabinet door according to the illustration.

xx0600002693

XT8/8.1
XT8/8.2
XP58.2
XP58.1

144 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.7 Installation of the option Hot plug

2.9.7 Installation of the option Hot plug

Location
To be able to use the Hot plug function an additional hot plug button is needed.
The figure below shows the location of the hot plug button on the controller.

xx1300000606

A Hot plug button

Required equipment

Equipment Art. no. Note


Hot plug 3HAC026225-002
Standard toolkit The contents are defined in sec-
tion Standard toolkit.
Other tools and procedures These procedures include refer-
may be required. See refer- ences to the tools required.
ences to these procedures
in the step-by-step instruc-
tions below.
Circuit diagram See Circuit diagrams on page 337.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 145
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.7 Installation of the option Hot plug
Continued

Procedure Single Cabinet Controller


The procedure below details how to install the hot plug button in the controller.
Action Note/Illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet,


disconnect the mains power. For more in-
formation, see Electrical safety on page 35.

2
WARNING

The unit is sensitive to ESD. Before hand-


ling the unit please read the safety inform-
ation in the section The unit is sensitive to
ESD on page 47

3 Disconnect the cable from the ethernet


connector for FlexPendant on the computer
unit.
4 Disconnect signal cabling from the panel
board unit.

xx0600002946

• A: Connector X10
5 Remove the FlexPendant connector with
harness from the Operator panel.

xx0600002948

• A: FlexPendant connector

Continues on next page


146 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.7 Installation of the option Hot plug
Continued

Action Note/Illustration
6 Remove the plug that covers the hot plug
hole.

xx0600002949

• A: Plug
7 Fit the new FlexPendant connector and hot
plug button with harness into the empty
hole on the operator panel.
8 Connect the ethernet connector for Flex-
Pendant to the computer unit.
9 Connect the signal connector A21.X10 to
the panel board unit.
10 Connect the cables to the hot plug button
connector.

41 14 X2 21 54
64

63
42 13 X1 22 53

207 22
RD 21
208 42
OG 41
209/BU1 14
YE/BU1 64
210/GN 13
211/BU 53
212/VT 54
Bridge 63 X1
213 X2 GND
xx0600002953

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 147
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.7 Installation of the option Hot plug
Continued

Action Note/Illustration
11 Place the warning label above the hot plug
button.

xx0600002957

• A: Warning label
12 Test the hot plug button function. See section Test of hot plug button func-
tion on page 148.

Test of hot plug button function


The procedure below details how to test the hot plug button function.
Action Note/Illustration
1 Make sure that the system is in automatic mode.
2 Press the motors on button.
3 Press and hold the hot plug button.
• Verify that the red lamp indicates when actu-
ated.
• Verify that the system still has motors on.
4 Keep pressing the hot plug button and at the same
time, switch the jumper plug with the FlexPendant
plug.
• Verify that the system still has motors on.
5 Release the hot plug button. Make sure that the button is not
• Verify that the system still has motors on. stuck in the actuated position
since it disables the FlexPendant
emergency stop button.
6 Press and hold the hot plug button.
7 Keep pressing the hot plug button and at the same
time, switch the FlexPendant plug with the jumper
plug.
8 Release the hot plug button.
• Verify that the FlexPendant starts up cor-
rectly.
• Verify that the system still has motors on.
9 Switch to Manual mode. Motors off
10 Confirm the mode change.
• Verify motors on.
11 Press the hot plug button.
• Verify motors off.

148 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.8 Installing the EPS board DSQC 646 for Electronic Position Switches

2.9.8 Installing the EPS board DSQC 646 for Electronic Position Switches

General
To use the option Electronic Position Switches you need to install an EPS board
in the robot controller. The procedure below will show how to install this board.

Note

It is not possible to have the options EPS and SafeMove installed at the same
time - that is, only one of these two options can be installed and used.

WARNING

The safety controller has passive monitoring, i.e. it does not stop the robot. If an
axis is outside its configured range, an output signal goes low. It is the
responsibility of the installation personnel to connect the output signals in such
a way that the robot is stopped if there is a risk of a dangerous situation.

Illustration
The EPS board should be mounted behind the axis computer.

B
xx0600003203

A EPS board
B Axis computer

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 149
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.8 Installing the EPS board DSQC 646 for Electronic Position Switches
Continued

Procedure
The procedure below details how to install an EPS board.
Action Note/illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabin-


et, disconnect the mains power. For
more information, see Electrical safety
on page 35.

2
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
(ESD)

The unit is sensitive to ESD. Before


handling the unit read the safety inform-
ation in section The unit is sensitive to
ESD on page 47.

3 If not already in place, fit the EMC strips


on the EPS board.

xx0700000087

4 Connect the short SMB cable and both


Ethernet cables to the EPS board before
mounting the board. These connections
may be difficult to reach once the board
is mounted.
The two Ethernet connectors on the EPS
board are interchangeable (it does not
matter which is connected to the main
computer and which is connected to the
axis computer).

xx0600003303

Continues on next page


150 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.8 Installing the EPS board DSQC 646 for Electronic Position Switches
Continued

Action Note/illustration
5 Remove the attachment screws of the
axis computer. Lift out the axis computer
so that the EPS board can be fitted be-
hind the axis computer.

xx0900000030

• A: axis computer
• B: attachment screws
6 Move the upper mounting rail:
1 Remove the Main Drive Unit. See
Replacement of drive units on
page 254.
2 Move the upper mounting rail two
steps (50 mm) down.
3 Replace the Main Drive Unit.

xx0900000737

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 151
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.8 Installing the EPS board DSQC 646 for Electronic Position Switches
Continued

Action Note/illustration
7 Fit the EPS board in the same place as A
the axis computer was before.

B B

xx0600003204

• A: EPS board
• B: attachment screws
8 Fit the axis computer on the EPS board.

A
B
C

xx0900000438

• A: axis computer
• B: EPS board
• C: attachment screws

Continues on next page


152 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.8 Installing the EPS board DSQC 646 for Electronic Position Switches
Continued

Action Note/illustration
9 Remove the Ethernet cable between the
main computer and the axis computer.
Replace it with the long Ethernet cable
from the EPS board to the main com-
puter. Connect the short Ethernet cable
between the EPS board and the axis
computer.

xx0600003218

10 Remove the SMB cable from the axis


computer and connect it to the EPS
board.
Connect the SMB cable from the EPS
board to the axis computer.

xx0600003207

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 153
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.8 Installing the EPS board DSQC 646 for Electronic Position Switches
Continued

Action Note/illustration
11 Remove the power cable from the axis
computer and connect it to the split
cable.
Connect the split cable to the EPS board
and the axis computer.

xx0600003208

12 Connect signal cables to the plug con-


tact, which is then connected to the I/O
connector of the EPS board.
• Connect a power supply, 24 V to
pin 1 and 0 V to pin 2. Check with
a voltmeter that the voltage is 24
V between pin 1 and 2 on the
Phoenix connector. A
• Connect the output signals from C
the EPS board (pin 3-12). B
• Connect the sync switch signals
to pin 13 and 14. If dual channel 1
wiring is not used, connect only
pin 14.

14

E
xx0600003209

• A: I/O Connector
• B: Plug contact
• C: Power supply
• D: 5 safe outputs (10 signals)
• E: Sync switch (dual signal)

154 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.9 Installing the SafeMove board DSQC 647

2.9.9 Installing the SafeMove board DSQC 647

General
To use the option SafeMove you need to install a SafeMove board DSQC 647 in
the robot controller. The procedure below will show how to install this board.

Note

It is not possible to have the options SafeMove and EPS installed at the same
time - that is, only one of these two options can be installed and used.

Location
The SafeMove board should be mounted behind the axis computer.

B
xx0600003203

A SafeMove board
B Axis computer

Procedure
The procedure below details how to install the SafeMove board.
Action Note/illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabin-


et, disconnect the mains power. For
more information, see Electrical safety
on page 35.

2
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
(ESD)

The unit is sensitive to ESD. Before


handling the unit read the safety inform-
ation in section The unit is sensitive to
ESD on page 47.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 155
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.9 Installing the SafeMove board DSQC 647
Continued

Action Note/illustration
3 If not already in place, fit the EMC strips
on the SafeMove board.

xx0800000204

• A: EMC strips
4 Connect both SMB cables and both
Ethernet cables to the SafeMove board
before mounting the board. These con-
nections may be difficult to reach once
the board is mounted.
The two Ethernet connectors on the
SafeMove board are interchangeable (it
does not matter which is connected to
the main computer and which is connec-
ted to the axis computer).

xx0800000103

• A: SMB1 cable
• B: SMB2 cable
• C: Ethernet cables

Continues on next page


156 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.9 Installing the SafeMove board DSQC 647
Continued

Action Note/illustration
5 Remove the attachment screws of the
axis computer. Lift out the axis computer
so that the SafeMove board can be fitted
behind the axis computer.

xx0900000030

• A: axis computer
• B: attachment screws (4 pcs)
6 Move the upper mounting rail:
1 Remove the Main Drive Unit. See
Replacement of drive units on
page 254.
2 Move the upper mounting rail two
steps (50 mm) down.
3 Replace the Main Drive Unit.

xx0900000737

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 157
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.9 Installing the SafeMove board DSQC 647
Continued

Action Note/illustration
7 Fit the SafeMove board in the same A
place as the axis computer was before.

B
B

xx0800000104

• A: SafeMove board
• B: attachments screws (4 pcs)
8 Fit the axis computer on the SafeMove
board.

xx0900000441

• A: Axis computer
• B: SafeMove board
• C: attachment screws (4 pcs)

Continues on next page


158 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.9 Installing the SafeMove board DSQC 647
Continued

Action Note/illustration
9 Remove the Ethernet cable between the
main computer and the axis computer.
Replace it with the long Ethernet cable
from the SafeMove board to the main
computer. Connect the short Ethernet
cable between the SafeMove board and
the axis computer.

xx0800000018

10 Disconnect the SMB cables from the


axis computer and connect them to the
SafeMove board.
A

xx0800000031

• A: SMB1 cable (robot)


• B: SMB2 cable (external axes)

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 159
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.9 Installing the SafeMove board DSQC 647
Continued

Action Note/illustration
11 Connect the SMB cables from the Safe-
Move board to the axis computer

A
B
xx0800000032

• A: SMB1 cable
• B: SMB2 cable
12 Disconnect the power cable from the
axis computer and connect it to the split
cable.
Connect the split cable to the SafeMove
board and the axis computer.

xx0800000028

Continues on next page


160 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.9 Installing the SafeMove board DSQC 647
Continued

Action Note/illustration
13 Connect the limit switch cable between SafeMove board:
the SafeMove board (X13) and the con-
tactor interface board (X21)

xx0800000033

Contactor interface board:

A
xx0800000105

• A: limit switch cable

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 161
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.9 Installing the SafeMove board DSQC 647
Continued

Action Note/illustration
14 Mount the plugs in the limit switch over- The limit switch override contact must be
ride contact (X23) at pin 1 and 4 on the plugged and not used when using SafeMove.
contactor interface board.

xx0800000035

• A: plug (2pcs)
15 Connect signal cables to the plug con- X12 X11 A
tacts, which is then connected to the I/O
connector of the SafeMove board.
B
1 1

B
10 10
1 1

C
12 12

X10 X9
C D
E
xx0700000640

• A: Power supply
• B: 8 safe outputs (16 signals)
• C: 8 safe inputs (16 signals)
• D: Sync switch (dual signal)
• E: Override operation input (dual sig-
nal)

162 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.10 Installing the Safety module DSQC1015 for SafeMove

2.9.10 Installing the Safety module DSQC1015 for SafeMove

General
To use the options SafeMove Basic and SafeMove Pro you need to install the
Safety module DSQC1015 in the robot controller.
The procedure below describes how to install the Safety module and how to connect
the cables. There are different sets of harnesses depending on if SafeMove is used
with a software switch or a hardware switch.

Note

It is not possible to have the options SafeMove Basic or SafeMove Pro installed
at the same time as Electronic Position Switches or first generation SafeMove.

Location
The Safety module DSQC1015 is a PCIexpress board that is located inside the
IRC5 main computer unit.

xx1500001760

A Safety module DSQC1015


B PCIexpress slot for other devices.

Note

Any PCIexpress board will fit in any of the PCIexpress slots. However, to minimize
temperature sensitivity, place the Safety module in the lower PCIexpress slot. If
there already is another unit (for example a fieldbus board) in the lower
PCIexpress slot, it is recommended to move this to the upper PCIexpress slot.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 163
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.10 Installing the Safety module DSQC1015 for SafeMove
Continued

Required equipment
Illustrations of the cable harnesses are found in sections:
• Connecting the cables to the Safety module (software switch and 731-1) on
page 166
• Connecting the cables to the Safety module (software switch and 731-2) on
page 168
• Connecting the cables to the Safety module (hardware switch and 731-1) on
page 170
• Connecting the cables to the Safety module (hardware switch and 731-2) on
page 172

Item Equipment Note


DSQC1015 Safety module 3HAC048858-001
A Harness safety keyless 3HAC056648-001
Used when the controller has software
switch.
A2 Harness safety hard Key switch 3HAC057150-001
Used when the controller has hardware
switch.
D Harness 24 V I/O DSQC1015 3HAC055633-001
B Harness auxiliary contact 3HAC055642-001
E Harness internal customer connection 3HAC056638-001
Used when the controller has the option
731-1 Safety internal connection.
F Harness external customer connection 3HAC056622-001
Used when the controller has the option
731-2 Safety external connection.
C Harness control panel emergency stop 3HAC056527-001
Used when the controller has the option
731-2 Safety external connection.
G Harness extended Key switch 3HAC023476-001
Used when the controller has the option
735-3 or 735-4 Additional contacts.
Standard toolkit The contents are defined in section Stand-
ard toolkit.
Circuit diagram See Circuit diagrams on page 337.

Installing the Safety module

Action Note/Illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet,


disconnect the mains power. For more in-
formation, see Electrical safety on page 35.

Continues on next page


164 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.10 Installing the Safety module DSQC1015 for SafeMove
Continued

Action Note/Illustration
2
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
(ESD)

The unit is sensitive to ESD. Before hand-


ling the unit please observe the safety in-
formation in section The unit is sensitive
to ESD on page 47

3 Open the computer unit by removing the


attachment screws and lift off the cover.
Disconnect the fan connector.

CAUTION

Be careful with the fan cable when opening


A
and removing the upper cover. The fan
B
cable must not be stretched.

xx1300000684

A Attachment screws (4 pcs.)


B Cover
4 Remove the attachment screw on top of
the slot bracket.
5 Fit the Safety module in position by push-
ing it into the socket on the motherboard.

A
B

xx1500001761

A Attachment screw
B Safety module

CAUTION

Always grip the board around the edges to


avoid damage to the board or its compon-
ents.

6 Refit the attachment screw on top of the


Safety module bracket.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 165
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.10 Installing the Safety module DSQC1015 for SafeMove
Continued

Action Note/Illustration
7 Refit the fan connector and close the com-
puter unit.

CAUTION

Be careful with the fan cable when closing


the cover. The fan cable must not be
A
squeezed.
B

xx1300000684

A Attachment screws (4 pcs.)


B Cover
8 Connect all cables according to the proced-
ures described below.

Connecting the cables to the Safety module (software switch and 731-1)
This procedure describes how to connect the cables for a robot controller equipped
with the options Software switch and 731-1 Safety internal connection.
Safety Module

A31.4
X6 X1
D
Panel Board
X12

X12

XS/XP37
X9

A XS/XP39
A21
X2

X6

K42 K43 E
X1

X5

XS/XP38
B
xx1500003028

Action Note/Illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet, disconnect


the mains power. For more information, see Electrical
safety on page 35.

2
WARNING

The unit is sensitive to ESD. Before handling the unit,


see The unit is sensitive to ESD on page 47.

Continues on next page


166 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.10 Installing the Safety module DSQC1015 for SafeMove
Continued

Action Note/Illustration
3 Dismantle mode switch, emergency stop button, motor
on button, and plug the holes on the front panel.
4 Disconnect connector A21.X9 from the panel board,
and remove the harness.
5 Connect connector A21.X9 on safety keyless harness
(A) to panel board.
6 Mount auxiliary contact harness contact blocks (B) on
contactors K42 and K43.
7 Connect auxiliary contact harness (B) to safety keyless
harness (A) at connector XS/XP38.
8 Connect safety keyless harness connector A31.4.X6
(A) to Safety module DSQC1015.
9 Connect connector A31.4.X1 on 24 V I/O harness (D)
to Safety module DSQC1015. CAUTION

Do not connect an external


power source.
Harness D
10 Disconnect existing connector A21.X12 from the panel
board, and connect to connector A21.X12.1 on 24 V A21.X12

I/O harness (D).

A21.X12.1

A21.X12

Existing harness

xx1500003043

11 Connect connector A21.X12 on 24 V I/O harness (D)


to panel board.
12 Disconnect existing connectors A21.X1, A21.X2, A21.X5
and A21.X6 from the panel board.
13 Connect connectors from internal customer connection
harness (E) to panel board.
14 Connect safety keyless harness (A) with internal cus-
tomer connection harness (E) at connector XS/XP39.
15 Route cables properly in existing cable holders.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 167
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.10 Installing the Safety module DSQC1015 for SafeMove
Continued

Connecting the cables to the Safety module (software switch and 731-2)
This procedure describes how to connect the cables for a robot controller equipped
with the options Software switch and 731-2 Safety external connection.
Safety Module

A31.4
D
X6 X1
EM Stop Panel Board

X12

X12
XS/XP37
S21.3 C

X9
A21
A XS/XP39

X2

X6
K42 K43
F

X1

X5
XS/XP38
B
Ext Safety Conn.

XS3

xx1500003029

Action Note/Illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet,


disconnect the mains power. For more in-
formation, see Electrical safety on page 35.

2
WARNING

The unit is sensitive to ESD. Before hand-


ling the unit, see The unit is sensitive to
ESD on page 47.

3 Dismantle mode switch and motor on but-


ton, and plug the holes on the front panel.
4 Remove cabling from the emergency stop Note wire numbers and placement before
button, and replace with emergency Stop removal.
harness (C).
5 Disconnect connector A21.X9 from the
panel board, and remove the harness.
6 Connect connector A21.X9 on safety key-
less harness (A) to panel board.
7 Mount auxiliary contact harness contact
blocks (B) on contactors K42 and K43.

Continues on next page


168 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.10 Installing the Safety module DSQC1015 for SafeMove
Continued

Action Note/Illustration
8 Connect auxiliary contact harness (B) to
safety keyless harness (A) at connector
XS/XP38.
9 Connect safety keyless harness connector
A31.4.X6 (A) to Safety module DSQC1015.
10 Connect connector A31.4.X1 on 24 V I/O
harness (D) to Safety module DSQC1015. CAUTION

Do not connect an external power source.

Harness D
11 Disconnect existing connector A21.X12
from the panel board, and connect to con-
nector A21.X12.1 on 24 V I/O harness (D). A21.X12

A21.X12.1

A21.X12

Existing harness
xx1500003043

12 Connect connector A21.X12 on 24 V I/O


harness (D) to panel board.
13 Disconnect existing connectors A21.X1,
A21.X2, A21.X5 and A21.X6 from the panel
board.
14 Connect connectors from external custom-
er connection harness (F) to panel board.
15 Connect safety keyless harness (A) with
external customer connection harness (F)
at connector XS/XP39.
16 Fit connector XS3 in to a free customer
connector slot on the connection panel.

XS3

xx1500003045

17 Route cables properly in existing cable


holders.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 169
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.10 Installing the Safety module DSQC1015 for SafeMove
Continued

Connecting the cables to the Safety module (hardware switch and 731-1)
This procedure describes how to connect the cables for a robot controller equipped
with the options Hardware switch and 731-1 Safety internal connection.

Note

This application requires options 735-3 additional contacts, (3 modes) or option


735-4 additional contacts, (2 modes).
EM Stop
Safety Module
S21.3
A31.4
Motors On
D
X6 X1
Panel Board
S21.2

X12

X12
X9
Key Switch A2
XS/XP37
S21.1 G A21
XS/XP39

X2

X6
E
X1

X5
K42 K43

XS/XP38
B
xx1500003030

Action Note/Illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet, disconnect


the mains power. For more information, see Electrical
safety on page 35.

2
WARNING

The unit is sensitive to ESD. Before handling the unit,


see The unit is sensitive to ESD on page 47.

3 Mount auxiliary contact harness contact blocks (B) on


contactors K42 and K43.
4 Connect auxiliary contact harness (B) to safety hard
Key switch harness (A2) at connector XS/XP38.
5 Connect safety hard Key switch harness connector
A31.4.X6 (A2) to Safety module DSQC1015.

Continues on next page


170 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.10 Installing the Safety module DSQC1015 for SafeMove
Continued

Action Note/Illustration
6 Connect connector A31.4.X1 on 24 V I/O harness (D)
to Safety module DSQC1015. CAUTION

Do not connect an external


power source.
Harness D
7 Disconnect existing connector A21.X12 from the panel
board, and connect to connector A21.X12.1 on 24 V A21.X12

I/O harness (D).

A21.X12.1

A21.X12

Existing harness

xx1500003043

8 Connect connector A21.X12 on 24 V I/O harness (D)


to panel board.
9 Disconnect existing connectors A21.X1, A21.X2, A21.X5
and A21.X6 from the panel board.
10 Connect connectors from internal customer connection
harness (E) to panel board.
11 Connect safety hard Key switch harness (A2) with in-
ternal customer connection harness (E) at connector
XS/XP39.
12 Connect extended Key switch harness (G) to safety
hard Key switch harness (A2) at connector XS/XP37.
13 Route cables properly in existing cable holders.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 171
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.10 Installing the Safety module DSQC1015 for SafeMove
Continued

Connecting the cables to the Safety module (hardware switch and 731-2)
This procedure describes how to connect the cables for a robot controller equipped
with the options Hardware switch and 731-2 Safety external connection.

Note

This application requires options 735-3 additional contacts, (3 modes) or option


735-4 additional contacts, (2 modes).
EM Stop
Safety Module
S21.3
A31.4
Motors On
D
X6 X1
Panel Board
S21.2

X12

X12
X9
Key Switch A2
XS/XP37
S21.1 G A21
XS/XP39

X2

X6
X1

X5
K42 K43 F
XS/XP38
B XS3

Ext Safety Conn.


xx1500003031

Action Note/Illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet, disconnect


the mains power. For more information, see Electrical
safety on page 35.

2
WARNING

The unit is sensitive to ESD. Before handling the unit,


see The unit is sensitive to ESD on page 47.

3 Mount auxiliary contact harness contact blocks (B) on


contactors K42 and K43.
4 Connect auxiliary contact harness (B) to safety hard
Key switch harness (A2) at connector XS/XP38.
5 Connect safety hard Key switch harness connector
A31.4.X6 (A2) to Safety module DSQC1015.

Continues on next page


172 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.10 Installing the Safety module DSQC1015 for SafeMove
Continued

Action Note/Illustration
6 Connect connector A31.4.X1 on 24 V I/O harness (D)
to Safety module DSQC1015. CAUTION

Do not connect an external


power source.
Harness D
7 Disconnect existing connector A21.X12 from the panel
board, and connect to connector A21.X12.1 on 24 V A21.X12

I/O harness (D).

A21.X12.1

A21.X12

Existing harness

xx1500003043

8 Connect connector A21.X12 on 24 V I/O harness (D)


to panel board.
9 Disconnect existing connectors A21.X1, A21.X2, A21.X5
and A21.X6 from the panel board.
10 Connect connectors from external customer connection
harness (F) to panel board.
11 Connect safety hard Key switch harness (A2) with ex-
ternal customer connection harness (F) at connector
XS/XP39.
12 Fit connector XS3 in to a free customer connector slot
on the connection panel.

XS3

xx1500003045

13 Connect extended Key switch harness (G) to safety


hard Key switch harness (A2) at connector XS/XP37.
14 Route cables properly in existing cable holders.

Product manual - IRC5 173


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.11 Installation of DispensePac support

2.9.11 Installation of DispensePac support

About DispensePac
To use the DispensePac option you need to connect externally placed Process I/O
board(s). The procedure below shows how to connect the DeviceNet cable from
the Process I/O board to the DeviceNet signal cable from the Process Interface
Board.

Location
The illustration below shows the location of the Process Interface Board and the
connection point of the DeviceNet cable(s).

xx0900000130

A Process Interface Board


B A57.X1 and A57.X2 DeviceNet connectors

Connecting Process I/O boards

Action Note
1 The DeviceNet cable from the Process I/O board The connectors A57.XT1 and
(not included in the DispensePac support option) A57.XT2 are found on the bottom
is connected (without termination resistance) to the of the Controller cabinet, at the
DeviceNet cable, marked A57.XT1/XT2, from the end of the cable from the Process
Process Interface Board. Interface Board.
2 If a second Process I/O board is to be connected,
remove the termination resistance on the second
cable and connect the second Process I/O board
to this cable.

174 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.12 Installation of additional drive units

2.9.12 Installation of additional drive units

General
The following sections describes the standard installation of additional drive units.
For more complex configurations please contact ABB.
For information about additional axes, see Application manual - Additional axes
and stand alone controller.
For information about motor units and gear units, see Product manual - Motor Units
and Gear Units.

Note

Make sure the robot software is configured to reflect the drive functions installed.

Location
The illustration shows the location of drive units in the controller.

A B C

D D

xx1400000484

A Additional Rectifier Unit (only used for additional axes in combination with small
robots)
B Main Drive Unit for small robots
C Main Drive Unit for large robots
D Additional Drive Units (for additional axes)

Configuration
The drive module exists in a number of versions, these are described in section
Configuration of the drive system on page 112.

Required equipment
General

Equipment Note
Drive units Specified in section Configuration of the drive system on
page 112.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 175
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.12 Installation of additional drive units
Continued

Equipment Note
Standard toolkit The contents are defined in section Standard toolkit, IRC5
on page 315.
Circuit diagram See Circuit diagrams on page 337.

First additional drive unit, low voltage system

Article number Equipment Quantity Note


3HAC030923-001 DSQC664 HV ADU Drive unit 1
3HAC035381-001 DSQC 417 LVHC ARU 1
3HAC036612-001 Harn-ARU/ADU DC-bus 1
3HAC036680-001 Adapter MDU - ARU 1
3HAC036686-001 Harn-ARU/MDU 24V 1
3HAC024254-005 Ethernet cable strait con 1 650 mm
3HAC024254-010 Ethernet cable strait con 1 400 mm
3HAC032595-001 Harn-MDU/ADU 24V 1
3HAC049514-001 i Harn-External axis 7 1
3HAC049197-001 i Ext.axis brake harness 1
3HAB9310-2 Gasket 1
3HAC035583-001 Bleeder 1,8 kW ass. 1
3HAC036275-001 Bracket bleeder 2 2
3HAC037758-001 Plug part with marking 2p 1 For bleeder.
3HAC029105-001 Fan 2 Not needed if option 708-2
and/or 764-2 is installed.
3HAC020677-001 Harness axc/XS41 1 This connector is only needed
if the external axis uses a
separate serial measurement
board (SMB) than the manipu-
lator.
i The old harness 3HAC032591-001 can be used instead of harnesses 3HAC049514-001 and
3HAC049197-001.

Second and third additional drive unit, low voltage system

Article number Equipment Quantity Note


3HAC030923-001 DSQC664 HV ADU Drive unit 1
3HAC036612-001 Harn-ARU/ADU DC-bus 1
3HAC032601-001 Harn-ADU 24V 1
3HAC024254-008 Ethernet cable strait con 1 280 mm
3HAC032592-001 Harn-External axis 8/9 1

First additional drive unit, high voltage system

Article number Equipment Quantity Note


3HAC030923-001 DSQC664 HV ADU Drive unit 1
3HAC032612-001 Harn-MDU/ADU DC-bus 1

Continues on next page


176 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.12 Installation of additional drive units
Continued

Article number Equipment Quantity Note


3HAC032595-001 Harn-MDU/ADU 24V 1
3HAC024254-007 Ethernet cable strait con 1 1000 mm
3HAC049514-001 i Harn-External axis 7 1
3HAC049197-001 i Ext.axis brake harness 1
3HAB9310-2 Gasket 1
3HAC029105-001 Fan 1 Not needed if option 708-2
and/or 764-2 is installed.
3HAC020677-001 Harness axc/XS41 1 This connector is only needed
if the external axis uses a
separate serial measurement
board (SMB) than the manipu-
lator.
i The old harness 3HAC032591-001 can be used instead of harnesses 3HAC049514-001 and
3HAC049197-001.

Second and third additional drive unit, high voltage system

Article number Equipment Quantity Note


3HAC030923-001 DSQC664 HV ADU Drive unit 1
3HAC032612-001 Harn-MDU/ADU DC-bus 1
3HAC032601-001 Harn-ADU 24V 1
3HAC024254-008 Ethernet cable strait con 1 280mm
3HAC032592-001 Harn-External axis 8/9 1

Installing the first additional drive unit


The procedure below details how to install the first additional drive unit.
Action Note/Illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet,


disconnect the mains power. For more in-
formation, see Electrical safety on page 35.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 177
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.12 Installation of additional drive units
Continued

Action Note/Illustration
2 Install the first additional drive unit in the
empty slot to the left.

xx0900000127

• A: cover plate
• B: Additional Drive Unit
• C: attachment screws
3 Install the additional rectifier unit.
Note

Only for small robots with low voltage


system.

4 Install the bleeder for the additional rectifier


unit. Note
See Replacement of brake resistor bleeder
on page 286. Only for small robots with low voltage
system.

5 Install the additional drive system fans.


See Replacement of drive system fans on Note
page 276.
Only for small robots with low voltage
system.

6 Install the XS7 additional axes power con-


nector and gasket to the front panel of the
IRC5 controller and connect the ground
cable.
7 Connect the additional axes brake harness i The additional axes brake harness con-
between the contactor board (A43) and the tains signals for external brake release,
internal signal connector from XS7. external brake release push button, and
PTC2.
8 Plug in the internal power connector from
XS7 to the additional drive unit (A41.3).

Continues on next page


178 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.12 Installation of additional drive units
Continued

Action Note/Illustration
9 For small robots with low voltage system:
• Connect the 24V cable between the Note
main drive unit (A41.1) and the addi-
tional rectifier unit (A41.2). Only for small robots with low voltage
• Connect the power cable adapter system.
between the power supply to the main
drive unit (A41.1) and the additional
rectifier unit (A41.2).
• Connect the power cable between the
additional rectifier unit (A41.2) and the
additional drive unit (A41.3) and con-
nect the ground cable.
• Connect the Ethernet cable between
the main drive unit (A41.1) and the
additional rectifier unit (A41.2).
10 For large robots with high voltage system:
• Connect the power cable between the Note
main drive unit (A41.1) and the addi-
tional drive unit (A41.3) and connect Only for large robots with high voltage
the ground cable. system.

11 Connect the 24V cable between the main


drive unit (A41.1) and the additional drive
unit (A41.3).
12 Connect the Ethernet cable between the
main drive unit (A41.1) and the additional
drive unit (A41.3).
13 Install the XS41 additional axes SMB con-
nector to the front panel of the IRC5 control- Note
ler and plug in the connector to the axis
computer (A42). This connector is only needed if the ex-
ternal axis uses a separate serial meas-
urement board (SMB) than the manipu-
lator.

14 Strap the new cabling together with the ex-


isting cabling inside the module. ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
(ESD)

All cables inside the controller must be


properly routed and strapped to avoid
interference.

15 Make sure the robot software is configured


to reflect the drive functions installed.
i The old harness 3HAC032591-001 can be used instead of harnesses 3HAC049514-001 and
3HAC049197-001.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 179
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.12 Installation of additional drive units
Continued

Installing a second and third additional drive unit


The procedure below details how to install a second and third additional drive unit.
A prerequisite is that the first additional drive unit is installed.
Action Note/Illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet,


disconnect the mains power. For more in-
formation, see Electrical safety on page 35.

2 Install the additional drive units in the IRC5


controller.

A B C

xx1400000272

A Additional drive unit 1


B Additional drive unit 2
C Additional drive unit 3
3 Install the additional axes power connector
modules (B, C) to the XS7 connector on the
front panel of the IRC5 controller.

A
B
C
D
E
F

xx1400000273

A Additional drive unit 1


B Additional drive unit 2
C Additional drive unit 3
D Empty, not used
E Signals
F Signals
4 Plug in the internal connectors from XS7 to
the additional drive units (A41.4 and A41.5).
5 Connect the power cables between the addi-
tional rectifier unit (A41.2) and the additional Note
drive units (A41.4 and A41.5) and connect
the ground cables. Only for small robots with low voltage
system.

Continues on next page


180 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.12 Installation of additional drive units
Continued

Action Note/Illustration
6 Connect the power cables between the main
drive unit (A41.1) and the additional drive Note
units (A41.4 and A41.5) and connect the
ground cables. Only for large robots with high voltage
system.

7 Connect the 24V cables between the main


drive unit (A41.1) and the additional drive
units (A41.4 and A41.5).
8 Connect the Ethernet cables between the
main drive unit (A41.1) and the additional
drive units (A41.4 and A41.5).
9 Install the XS41 additional axes SMB con-
nector to the front panel of the IRC5 control- Note
ler and plug in the connector to the axis
computer (A42). This connector is only needed if the ex-
ternal axis uses a separate serial meas-
urement board (SMB) than the manipu-
lator.

10 Strap the new cabling together with the ex-


isting cabling inside the module. ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
(ESD)

All cables inside the controller must be


properly routed and strapped to avoid
interference.

11 Make sure the robot software is configured


to reflect the drive functions installed.

Product manual - IRC5 181


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.13 Installation of additional Drive Module

2.9.13 Installation of additional Drive Module

General
To be able to use a MultiMove system or to control more than 3 additional axes,
an additional Drive Module is needed. The IRC5 Controller is prepared for up to
three additional Drive Modules.

xx0400001042

For more information about installing additional Drive Modules, see Application
manual - MultiMove. For more information about stacking modules and process
modules, see Product specification - Controller IRC5.

182 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.14 Process module

2.9.14 Process module

About the process module


As an option an empty process module can be purchased, to use for custom
equipment. There is one small and one large variant of the process module. An
installation kit is available to provide easy mounting of equipment inside the process
module.

Option numbers

Product Option number


Process module, Small 768-1
Process module, Large 768-2
Installation kit 715-1

Measurements
Small process module

550

720

560

700

xx1500000116

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 183
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.14 Process module
Continued

Large process module

800

970

560

700

xx1500000117

Installation kit
The installation kit can be used for both the small and the large process module.
It consists of the following parts.
A B C

J
D E F G H I

xx1500000118

Continues on next page


184 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.14 Process module
Continued

A Mounting bracket (10 pcs)


B Cable protection
C Mounting beam (2 pcs)
D Fastite screw (54 pcs)
E Cable inlet
F Velcro with a eyelet (2 pcs)
G I/O mounting plate
H Terminal rail
I Mounting bracket, short (3 pcs)
J Connection block bracket

Example of process module interior

A B

D E

xx1500000115

A Mounting beam
B Mounting bracket
C Connection block bracket
D Mounting bracket, short
E I/O mounting plate

Product manual - IRC5 185


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.15 Installation of drive system fans with temperature sensors

2.9.15 Installation of drive system fans with temperature sensors

Location
The illustration below shows the location of the drive system fan unit in the
controller.

A
B

xx0500002011

A Drive system fan (up to 4 pcs)


B Cover
C Attachment screw (4 pcs)

Required equipment

Equipment Note
The retrofit set includes the following for Retrofit set Temp Sensor Fan:
each fan: 3HAC056513-001, one fan
• Grommet
3HAC056513-002, two fans
• Fan holder
3HAC056513-003, three fans
• Fan
3HAC056513-004, four fans
• Temp sensor with sensor bracket
• Gasket (4 pcs)
Standard toolkit The contents are defined in section Standard
toolkit.

Continues on next page


186 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.15 Installation of drive system fans with temperature sensors
Continued

Equipment Note
Other tools and procedures may be re- These procedures include references to the
quired. See references to these procedures tools required.
in the step-by-step instructions below.
Circuit diagram See Circuit diagrams on page 337.

Removing the system fan


If a system fan is used, it should be removed when installing sensor controlled
drive system fans.
Action Note/Illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside


the cabinet, disconnect the
mains power. For more inform-
ation, see Electrical safety on
page 35.

2 Remove the attachment screws


on the top cover.

xx0700000416

A Fan
B Top cover
C Attachment screws (4 pcs)
3 Remove the top cover.
4 Disconnect the connector to the
fan.
5 Remove the screw (item B in
image below).

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 187
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.15 Installation of drive system fans with temperature sensors
Continued

Action Note/Illustration
6 Push the fan upwards, and pull
it out. C

xx0700000417

A Fan
B Screw
C Cable gland
7 Remove the cable and replace
the cable gland with the grom-
met.

Removing the old drive system fan

Action Note /illustration


1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet,


disconnect the mains power. For more in-
formation, see Electrical safety on page 35.

2 Remove the moist dust filter magazine. How to remove the moist dust filter
(Option) magazine is detailed in section Replace-
ment of moist dust filter on page 197.
3 Loosen the four attachment screws to the
cover.
4 Remove the cover.
5 Disconnect the connector to the fan.

Continues on next page


188 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.15 Installation of drive system fans with temperature sensors
Continued

Action Note /illustration


6 Push the fan upwards and remove it.

xx0500002015

A Fan
B Latches
C Grooves

Assemble the sensor controlled fan

Action Note/illustration
1 Fit the gaskets in all the four corners on A
B
the inside of the fan holder.

E F
xx1500001754

A Fan holder
B Fan
C Power supply connector
D Sensor connector
E Gasket (4 pcs)
F Indication of air flow direction
2 Fit the fan in the fan holder. Look at the
indication of air flow direction to make
sure the fan is inserted the correct way.
3 Fit the connector for fan power supply
from above into the outer hole on the
bracket of the fan holder.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 189
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.15 Installation of drive system fans with temperature sensors
Continued

Action Note/illustration
4 Strap the wires from the sensor together
with the other wires from the fan to avoid
the sensor wires to be damaged by sharp
edges.

xx1700001154

5 Fit the sensor connector from below into


the inner hole on the bracket of the fan
holder.

Fitting the drive system fan with temp sensor

Action Note/illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet,


disconnect the mains power. For more in-
formation, see Electrical safety on
page 35.

2 Insert the sensor between the heat sink B C


fins in the middle. A

xx1500000858

A Sensor on sensor holder


B Sensor cable
C Fan channel bracket
3 Route the fan cable behind the fan channel
bracket.

Continues on next page


190 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.9.15 Installation of drive system fans with temperature sensors
Continued

Action Note/illustration
4 Fit the sensor holder on the edge of the B
A
fan channel bracket.

xx1500000857

A Sensor holder
B Sensor cable
5 Fit the fan by placing the latches in the A E D
back of the fan housing into the grooves B
and press the fan down. C

xx1500000856

A Fan
B Latches
C Grooves
D Temp sensor cable
E Cable gland
6 Slide the cable gland into the indentation
in the fan housing. Gently pull the cable
so there is no slack on the cable between
the sensor and the cable gland.
7 Connect the connectors to the fan.
8 Refit the cover and the attachment screws.
9 Refit the moist dust filter magazine. (Op-
tion)

Product manual - IRC5 191


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.10 Testing

2.10 Testing

Function tests
When the installation is complete, perform the function tests in section Function
tests on page 205 to verify that the safety features work properly.

192 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Maintenance
3.1 Maintenance schedule, controller IRC5

3 Maintenance
3.1 Maintenance schedule, controller IRC5

General
The controller must be maintained at regular intervals to ensure its function. The
maintenance activities and their respective intervals are specified below:
Certain activities to be performed as specified in the Maintenance Schedule are
not all detailed in this chapter, but in the Repair chapter.
Please refer to the Repair chapter of the equipment in question.

Intervals

Equipment Maintenance Interval Note


activity
Complete controller modules Inspection 12 months * Inspection of the controller on
page 195.
Moist dust filter Cleaning Cleaning moist dust filter on
page 201
Moist dust filter Replacement 24 months * Replacement of moist dust
filter on page 197
Heat exchanger fan Inspection 6 months * Inspection of the controller on
page 195.
Heat exchanger fan Cleaning 12 months * Cleaning of the controller
cabinet on page 200.
FlexPendant Cleaning When needed Cleaning the FlexPendant on
page 203.
Earth fault breaker F4 (tested Function test 6 months Function test of earth fault
if used) breaker F4 on page 205
Emergency stop (operating Function test 12 months Function test of emergency
panel) stop on page 206
Emergency stop (FlexPend- Function test 12 months Function test of emergency
ant) stop on page 206
Mode switch Function test 12 months Function test of mode switch
on page 207
Enable device Function test 12 months Function test of three-position
enabling device on page 208
Motor contactors K42, K43 Function test 12 months Function test of motor contact-
ors K42 and K43 on page 209
Brake contactor K44 Function test 12 months Function test of brake contact-
or K44 on page 210
Auto stop (tested if used) Function test 12 months Function test of Automatic
Stop on page 211
General stop (tested if used) Function test 12 months Function test of General Stop
on page 212
Superior stop (tested if used) Function test 12 months Function test of superior stop
on page 213

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 193
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Maintenance
3.1 Maintenance schedule, controller IRC5
Continued

Equipment Maintenance Interval Note


activity
Limit switch (tested if used) Function test 12 months Function test of limit switch
on page 214
Automatic fuse F1 Function test 12 months Function test of automatic
fuse F1 on page 215
Reduced speed control Function test During com- Function test of reduced
missioning speed control on page 216.

*) The time interval depends on the working environment of the equipment: a


cleaner environment may extend the maintenance interval and vice versa.

Function test after replacement of component


In addition to performing the function tests according to the intervals, function tests
should be performed after replacing a component in the controller.

194 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Maintenance
3.2.1 Inspection of the controller

3.2 Inspection activities

3.2.1 Inspection of the controller

Inspection
The procedure below describes how to inspect the IRC5 controller.

WARNING

Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the IRC5
controller, or units connected to the controller:
• Switch off all electric power supplies with the power switch!
• Before handling, make sure you are grounded through a special ESD wrist
bracelet or similar. Many components inside the module are sensitive to
ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and can be destroyed if exposed to discharge.
See the Safety chapter, The unit is sensitive to ESD on page 47

Action Note/Illustration
1 Inspect all sealing joints and cable
glands to make sure they are airtight
in order to prevent dust and dirt from
penetrating into the controller cabinet.
2 Inspect connectors and cabling to
make sure they are securely fastened
and cabling not damaged.
3 Inspect the heat exchanger and the fan
on the controller to make sure it is
clean.

xx0500001952

Parts:
• A: fan
• B: heat exchanger
• C: top cover
• D: attachment screw (4 pcs)

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 195
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Maintenance
3.2.1 Inspection of the controller
Continued

Action Note/Illustration
4 Inspect the drive system fans and air
channels in the controller to make sure
they are clean.

xx0500002172

• A: drive system fans (4 pcs)


5 After cleaning:
• Temporarily turn the power sup-
ply to the modules on.
• Inspect all fans to make sure
they function correctly.
• Turn the power supply back off.
6 Replace any malfunctioning fans as
described in Replacement of heat ex-
change unit and fan on page 228.

196 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Maintenance
3.3.1 Replacement of moist dust filter

3.3 Changing/replacing activities

3.3.1 Replacement of moist dust filter

Location
The moist dust filters are located as shown in the illustration below.

xx1300000852

A Moist dust filter magazine

Required equipment

Equipment Note
Moist dust filter
Other tools and procedures may be required. These procedures include references to the
See references to these procedures in the step- tools required.
by-step instructions below.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 197
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Maintenance
3.3.1 Replacement of moist dust filter
Continued

Removal
The procedure below details how to replace the moist dust filter.
Action Note/Illustration
1 Pull the moist dust filter magazine upwards.

xx0700000131

2 Pull the moist dust filter magazine in the arrow


direction and remove it.

xx0700000132

3 Remove the old moist dust filter by releasing


the lock shackle and lifting it.

xx0200000003

Continues on next page


198 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Maintenance
3.3.1 Replacement of moist dust filter
Continued

Refitting
The procedure below details how to refit the moist dust filter.
Action Note/Illustration
1 Fit the new moist dust filter in the magazine and
lock it with the lock shackle.

Note

The compact surface on the moist dust filter


must be turned inwards to the cabinet.

2 Fit the moist dust filter magazine on the cabinet


and push inwards.

xx0700000134

3 Push the moist dust filter magazine downwards


until it stops.

xx0700000135

Product manual - IRC5 199


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Maintenance
3.4.1 Cleaning of the controller cabinet

3.4 Cleaning activities

3.4.1 Cleaning of the controller cabinet

Required equipment

Equipment, etc. Note


Vacuum cleaner ESD protected
Cleaning agent, exterior cleaning If necessary, use a lint-free cloth with, for ex-
ample, alcohol

Internal cleaning

Action Note/Illustration
1 Clean the cabinet interior with a vacuum cleaner if
necessary.
2 The control module is equipped with a heat ex- If required, remove any heat
changer, it is important that it is clean. exchangers before cleaning as
The heat exchanger is located on the rear of the detailed in the section, Replace-
controller. ment of heat exchange unit and
fan on page 228.
3 Remove the drive module fans and use compressed How to remove the fans is de-
air to clean: tailed in section, Replacement
• the fans of drive system fans on page 276.
• the air channels
• the drive unit heat sinks.

Cleaning considerations
This section specifies some special considerations when cleaning the controller.
• Always use ESD protection.
• Always use cleaning equipment as specified above. Any other cleaning
equipment may shorten the life of paint work, rust inhibitors, signs, or labels.
• Always make sure that all protective covers are fitted to the controller before
cleaning.
• Never remove any covers or other protective devices when cleaning the
outside of the controller.
• Never use compressed air or spray with a high pressure cleaner.
• Never leave the door open when cleaning the exterior.

200 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Maintenance
3.4.2 Cleaning moist dust filter

3.4.2 Cleaning moist dust filter

Location
The moist dust filters are located as shown in the illustration below.

xx1300000852

A Moist dust filter magazine

Required equipment

Equipment Note
Cleaning agent Water 30-40°C with cleansing liquid or detergent.
Compressed air

Cleaning
The procedure below details how to clean the moist dust filter.
Action Note/Illustration
1 Remove the moist dust filter. How to remove the moist dust filter is
detailed in section Replacement of moist
dust filter on page 197.
2 Clean the filter three or four times.
3 Allow the filter to dry in one of these ways:
• Lying flat on a flat surface Note
• Blow with compressed air in opposite
direction of filter airflow. Do not wring the filter out!

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 201
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Maintenance
3.4.2 Cleaning moist dust filter
Continued

Action Note/Illustration
4 Refit the moist dust filter.

202 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Maintenance
3.4.3 Cleaning the FlexPendant

3.4.3 Cleaning the FlexPendant

Location
The surfaces to clean are shown in the illustration below.

xx0400000973

A Touch screen
B Hard buttons

Required equipment

Equipment, etc. Note


Soft cloth ESD protected
Water/Mild cleaning agent

Clean the touch screen


This section describes how to clean the touch screen.
Action Info/Illustration
1 Lock the screen.

en0400001221

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 203
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Maintenance
3.4.3 Cleaning the FlexPendant
Continued

Action Info/Illustration
2 It is safe to clean the FlexPendant
when the Lock screen appears.

en0400000658

3 Clean the touch screen and hard-


ware buttons using a soft cloth and
water or a mild cleaning agent.
4 Unlock the screen, by tapping the
buttons.

en0400000658

Cleaning considerations
The section below specifies some special considerations when cleaning the
FlexPendant:
• Use ESD Protection
• Use cleaning equipment as specified above. Any other cleaning equipment
may shorten the life time of the touch screen.
• Check that all protective covers are fitted to the device before cleaning.
• Make sure that no foreign objects or liquids can penetrate into the device.
• Do not remove any covers before cleaning the FlexPendant.
• Do not spray with a high pressure cleaner.
• Do not clean the device, operating panel and operating elements with
compressed air, solvents, scouring agent or scrubbing sponges.

204 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Maintenance
3.5.1 Function test of earth fault breaker F4

3.5 Function tests

3.5.1 Function test of earth fault breaker F4

Performing the function test

Action Note
1 Start the robot system.
2 Press the button with the text “test” on the This test is passed if the earth fault breaker
earth fault breaker. is released when pressing the test button.
If the earth fault breaker did not release,
the test failed and the root cause of the
failure must be found.
3 After the test, reset the earth fault breaker.

Product manual - IRC5 205


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Maintenance
3.5.2 Function test of emergency stop

3.5.2 Function test of emergency stop

Overview
Perform this test on the emergency stop button both on the operating panel and
on the FlexPendant.

Performing the function test

Action Note
1 Make a visual inspection of the emergency If any damage is found on the emergency
stop button to make sure it is not physically stop button, it must be replaced.
damaged.
2 Start the robot system.
3 Press the emergency stop button. The test is passed if the event message
10013 Emergency stop state appears on
the FlexPendant.
If the event message 10013 Emergency
stop state does not appear, or if the event
message 20223 Emergency stop conflict
appears on the FlexPendant, the test is
failed and the root cause of the failure must
be found.
4 After the test, release the emergency stop
button and press the motors on button to
reset the emergency stop state.

206 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Maintenance
3.5.3 Function test of mode switch

3.5.3 Function test of mode switch

2-position mode switch

Action Note
1 Start the robot system.
2 Start with the mode switch in manual mode This test is passed if it is possible to run
and then switch the mode switch to auto the robot in auto mode.
mode. Run the robot in auto mode. If it is not possible to run the robot in auto
mode, this test is failed and the root cause
of the failure must be found.
3 Switch the mode switch to manual mode. This test is passed if the event message
“10015 Manual mode selected” appears in
the FlexPendant log.
If the event message “10015 Manual mode
selected” is not shown in the FlexPendant
log, the test failed and the root cause of
the failure must be found.

3-position mode switch

Action Note
1 Start the robot system.
2 Start with the mode switch in manual mode This test is passed if it is possible to run
and then switch the mode switch to auto the robot in auto mode.
mode. Run the robot in auto mode. If it is not possible to run the robot in auto
mode, this test is failed and the root cause
of the failure must be found.
3 Switch the mode switch to manual full This test is passed if it is possible to run
speed mode. Run the program in manual the program in manual full speed mode.
full speed mode. If it is not possible to run the program in
manual full speed mode, this test is failed
and the root cause of the failure must be
found.
4 Switch the mode switch to manual mode. This test is passed if the event message
“10015 Manual mode selected” appears in
the FlexPendant log.
If the event message “10015 Manual mode
selected” is not shown in the FlexPendant
log, the test failed and the root cause of
the failure must be found.

Product manual - IRC5 207


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Maintenance
3.5.4 Function test of three-position enabling device

3.5.4 Function test of three-position enabling device

Performing the function test

Action Note
1 Start the robot system and turn the mode
switch to manual mode.
2 Press the three-position enabling device This test is passed if the event message
to the middle position and then hold the 10011 Motors ON state appears in the
enabling device in this position. event log.
If the event message 10011 Motors ON
state does not appear, or if the event
message 20224 Enabling device conflict
appears in the event log, then the test has
failed and the root cause of the failure must
be found.
3 While still holding the three-position en- This test is passed if the event message
abling device pressed, press the enabling 10012 safety guard stop state appears in
device harder to the enable the device's the event log.
third position. If the event message 10012 Safety guard
stop state does not appear, or if the event
message 20224 Enabling device conflict
appears in the event log, then the test has
failed and the root cause of the failure must
be found.

208 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Maintenance
3.5.5 Function test of motor contactors K42 and K43

3.5.5 Function test of motor contactors K42 and K43

Performing the function test

Action Note
1 Start the robot system and turn the mode
switch to manual mode.
2 Press the three-position enabling device This test is passed if the event message
to the middle position and then hold the "10011 Motors ON state" appears in the
enabling device in this position. FlexPendant log.
If the event message "37001 Motor on ac-
tivation error" appears on the FlexPendant
log, the test is failed and the root cause of
the failure must be found.
3 Release the three-position enabling device. This test is passed if the event message
"10012 safety guard stop state" appears
in the FlexPendant log.
If the event message "20227 Motor contact-
or conflict" appears in the FlexPendant
log, the test is failed and the root cause of
the failure must be found.

Product manual - IRC5 209


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Maintenance
3.5.6 Function test of brake contactor K44

3.5.6 Function test of brake contactor K44

Performing the function test

Action Note
1 Start the robot system and turn the mode
switch to manual mode.
2 Press the three-position enabling device This test is passed if the brakes is disen-
to the middle position and then hold the gaged and the manipulator can be moved.
enabling device in this position. If the Event message "50056 Joint colli-
While having eye contact with the manipu- sion" appears in the FlexPendant log, the
lator, move the joystick slightly in any dir- test is failed and the root cause of the fail-
ection to disengage the brakes. ure must be found.
3 Release the three-position enabling device This test is passed if the event message
to engage the brakes. "10012 safety guard stop state" appears
in the FlexPendant log.
If the event message "37101 Brake failure"
appears in the FlexPendant log, the test is
failed and the root cause of the failure must
be found.

210 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Maintenance
3.5.7 Function test of Automatic Stop

3.5.7 Function test of Automatic Stop

Performing the function test

Action Note
1 Start the robot system and change the op-
erating mode to auto mode.
2 Activate the Automatic Stop, for example The test is passed if the event message
by opening the connected robot cell door, 20205 Auto stop open appears in the event
which has interlock connection with Auto- log.
matic Stop. If the event message 20205 Auto stop
open does not appear or if the event mes-
sage 20225 Auto stop conflict appears in
the event log, then the test has failed and
the root cause of the failure must be found.

Product manual - IRC5 211


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Maintenance
3.5.8 Function test of General Stop

3.5.8 Function test of General Stop

Performing the function test

Action Note
1 Start the robot system.
2 Activate the General Stop. The test is passed if the event message
“20206 General stop open” appears in the
FlexPendant log.
If the event message “20206 General stop
open” does not appear or if the event
message “20226 General stop conflict”
appears in the Flexpendant log, the test is
failed and the root cause of the failure must
be found.

212 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Maintenance
3.5.9 Function test of superior stop

3.5.9 Function test of superior stop

Performing the function test

Action Note
1 Start the robot system.
2 Activate the superior stop. The test is passed if the event message
“20215 Superior stop open” appears in the
FlexPendant log.
If the event message “20215 Superior stop
open” does not appear or if the event
message “20220 Superior stop conflict”
appears in the Flexpendant log, the test is
failed and the root cause of the failure must
be found.

Product manual - IRC5 213


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Maintenance
3.5.10 Function test of limit switch

3.5.10 Function test of limit switch

Testing limit switches on manipulator


This must be tested on all the axes that has mounted limit switches.
Action Note
1 Start the robot system.
2 Jog the axis under test to the limit switch The test is passed if the event message
activation position. ”20214 Limit switch open” appears in the
FlexPendant log when the axis reaches the
limit switch activation position.
If the event message ”20214 Limit switch
open” does not appear or if the event
message “20222 Limit switch conflict” ap-
pears in the FlexPendant log, the test is
failed and the root cause of the failure must
be found.
3 After the test the robot must be jogged out
of the limit switch activation position again.
This is done by jogging the robot after
pressing the limit switch override push
button. See Connecting a Limit switch
override push button on page 108.

Testing limit switches for a SafeMove system


Perform validation of the function Safe Axis Speed. See Application
manual - SafeMove1. If this test is passed the limit switch works as intended.

214 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Maintenance
3.5.11 Function test of automatic fuse F1

3.5.11 Function test of automatic fuse F1

Performing the function test

Action Note
1 Start the robot system.
2 To test the automatic fuse, insert a screw This test is passed if the automatic fuse is
driver in the test opening. released when inserting the screw driver
in the test opening.
If the automatic fuse did not release, the
test failed and the root cause of the failure
must be found.
3 After the test, reset the automatic fuse.

Product manual - IRC5 215


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Maintenance
3.5.12 Function test of reduced speed control

3.5.12 Function test of reduced speed control

Performing the function test

Action Note
1 Start the robot system and change the op-
erating mode to manual.
2 Create a test program where the robot The distance and speed must be adapted
moves along a known distance with a pro- to the current installation and robot model.
grammed speed higher than 250 mm/s.
3 Start the program in manual mode and This test is passed if the speed of the robot
measure the time it takes for the robot to does not exceed 250 mm/s, otherwise the
travel the distance. test is failed and the root cause of the fail-
ure must be found.
Tip

To get accurate results, use sensors or I/O


signals to measure the time.

216 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.1 Overview

4 Repair
4.1 Overview

General
The ABB IRC5 controller has all components in one cabinet.
Additional drive modules can be connected to the controller. These are used in
MultiMove applications where one controller is controlling up to four manipulators.

xx1300000678

A IRC5 controller
B Additional drive module

The IRC5 controller is regarded as the standard configuration and therefor the
illustration in the procedures detailed in this manual are based on that.
If the procedure in general is the same, it is mentioned in each procedure where
the part is located in the IRC5 controller. If there are significant differences, both
the IRC5 controller and the drive module configurations are shown.

Note

When replacing a part on the IRC5, report to your local ABB the serial number,
the article number, and the revision of both the replaced unit and the replacement
unit.
This is particularly important for safety equipment to maintain the safety integrity
of the installation.

Product manual - IRC5 217


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.2 Replacement of panel board

4.2 Replacement of panel board

Location
The panel board unit, DSQC 643, is located as shown in the illustration below.

A B C D E

xx1300000679

A Operator’s panel
B Computer unit
C Drive system
D Axis computer
E Panel board unit

Required equipment

Equipment Note
Panel board unit DSQC 643
See Spare parts on page 317.
Standard toolkit The contents are defined in section Standard
toolkit!
Other tools and procedures may be required. These procedures include references to the
See references to these procedures in the tools required.
step-by-step instructions below.
Circuit diagram See Circuit diagrams on page 337.

Continues on next page


218 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.2 Replacement of panel board
Continued

Removal
The procedure below details how to remove the panel board unit.
Action Note/Illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet, discon-


nect the mains power. For more information, see
Electrical safety on page 35.

2
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD)

The unit is sensitive to ESD. Before handling the


unit read the safety information in section The unit
is sensitive to ESD on page 47.

3 Disconnect all connectors.


Note

Make a note of any connections.

4 Remove the lower attachment screw, and remove


the Panel Unit.

xx0400000812

• A: fixed attachments
• B: hole for attachment
screw

Refitting
The procedure below details how to refit the panel board unit.
Action Note/Illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet, discon-


nect the mains power. For more information, see
Electrical safety on page 35.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 219
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.2 Replacement of panel board
Continued

Action Note/Illustration
2
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD)

The unit is sensitive to ESD. Before handling the


unit read the safety information in section The unit
is sensitive to ESD on page 47.

3 Refit the panel board unit.


4 Refit the lower attachment screw.

xx0400000812

• A: fixed attachments
• B: hole for attachment
screw
5 Reconnect all connectors.
6 Perform the function tests in section Function tests
on page 205 to verify that the safety features work
properly.

220 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.3 Replacement of Flange disconnect

4.3 Replacement of Flange disconnect

Location
The Flange disconnect unit is located as shown in the illustration below.

xx0600003133

A Flange disconnect

Required equipment

Equipment Art. no. Note


Flange disconnect 3HAC027113-001
Standard toolkit The contents are defined in sec-
tion Standard toolkit!
Other tools and procedures These procedures include refer-
may be required. See refer- ences to the tools needed.
ences to these procedures in
the step-by-step instructions
below.
Circuit diagram See Circuit diagrams on page 337.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 221
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.3 Replacement of Flange disconnect
Continued

Removal
The procedure below details how to remove the Flange disconnect unit.
Action Note/Illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet, discon-


nect the mains power. For more information, see
Electrical safety on page 35.

2 Remove the link by pushing the spring forward.

WARNING

Be careful when removing the link. The link is


spring-loaded and the spring can with high force
pull the link down when it is released.

xx0600003141

• A: spring
• B: link
3 Remove the two lower attachment screws.

xx0600003139

• A: attachment screws

Continues on next page


222 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.3 Replacement of Flange disconnect
Continued

Action Note/Illustration
4 Loosen the two upper attachment screws and
remove the unit.

xx0600003140

• A: attachment screws
5 Disconnect the cables.

Refitting
The procedure below details how to refit the Flange disconnect unit.
Action
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet, disconnect the mains power. For more in-
formation, see Electrical safety on page 35.

2 Reconnect the cables.


3 Refit the unit and fasten the two upper attachment screws.
4 Refit the two lower attachment screws.
5 Refit the link to the unit.
6 Perform the function tests in section Function tests on page 205 to verify that the safety
features work properly.

Product manual - IRC5 223


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.4 Replacement of I/O units and Gateways

4.4 Replacement of I/O units and Gateways

General
A number of I/O units and gateway units may be installed in the controller. These
are specified in DeviceNet I/O units on page 124.
How to configure the I/O units is detailed in Operating manual - RobotStudio.

Location
The location of the I/O units, gateway units, or encoder interface units are shown
in the illustration below.

xx0500001859

A Gateway, I/O Units or encoder interface units


B Mounting rail
C Connection terminal XT31

Required equipment

Equipment Note
A number of units are available. Specified in section DeviceNet I/O units on
page 124.
Standard toolkit The contents are defined in section Standard
toolkit!
Other tools and procedures may be required. These procedures include references to the
See references to these procedures in the tools required.
step-by-step instructions below.
Circuit diagram See Circuit diagrams on page 337.

Continues on next page


224 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.4 Replacement of I/O units and Gateways
Continued

Removal
The procedure below details how to remove the I/O units or gateway units.
Action Note/illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet,


disconnect the mains power. For more inform-
ation, see Electrical safety on page 35.

2
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
(ESD)

The unit is sensitive to ESD. Before handling


the unit read the safety information in section
The unit is sensitive to ESD on page 47.

3 Identify the I/O unit or gateway unit to be re-


placed.
4 Disconnect the connectors from the unit. Note which connector goes where, to
facilitate reassembly.
5 Tip the unit away from the mounting rail and
remove it.

Refitting
The procedure below details how to refit the I/O units or gateway units.
Action
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet, disconnect the mains power. For more in-
formation, see Electrical safety on page 35.

2
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD)

The unit is sensitive to ESD. Before handling the unit read the safety information in
section The unit is sensitive to ESD on page 47.

3 Hook the unit back onto the mounting rail and snap it gently in position.
4 Reconnect all connectors disconnected during removal.
5 Perform the function tests in section Function tests on page 205 to verify that the safety
features work properly.

Product manual - IRC5 225


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.5 Replacement of backup energy bank

4.5 Replacement of backup energy bank

Location
The illustration below shows the location of the backup energy bank in the IRC5
controller.
The backup energy bank is located behind the main computer attachment plate.

xx1300000680

A Contactor interface board


B Contactor
C Drive system power supply
D Backup energy bank
Customer I/O power supply
E Control power supply

Required equipment

Equipment Note
Backup energy bank DSQC 655 with or without adapter plate.
See Spare parts on page 317.
Standard toolkit The contents are defined in section Standard
toolkit.

Continues on next page


226 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.5 Replacement of backup energy bank
Continued

Equipment Note
Other tools and procedures may be required. These procedures include references to the
See references to these procedures in the tools required.
step-by-step instructions below.
Circuit diagram See Circuit diagrams on page 337.

Removal
The procedure below details how to remove the backup energy bank.
Action Note/Illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet,


disconnect the mains power. For more inform-
ation, see Electrical safety on page 35.

2 Disconnect the connector X4 from the distri-


bution board.
3 Remove the attachment screw.
4 Pull the backup energy bank out.

Refitting
The procedure below details how to refit the backup energy bank.
Action
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet, disconnect the mains power. For more in-
formation, see Electrical safety on page 35.

2 Refit the new backup energy bank.


3 Refit and tighten the attachment screw.
4 Reconnect the connector to the control power supply connector X4.
5 Refit the front with the Panel Board Unit.
6 Perform the function tests in section Function tests on page 205 to verify that the safety
features work properly.

Product manual - IRC5 227


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.6 Replacement of heat exchange unit and fan

4.6 Replacement of heat exchange unit and fan

Location
The heat exchanger unit is located in the back of the controller as shown below.

xx0500001952

A Fan
B Heat exchanger
C Top cover
D Attachment screws (4 pcs)

Required equipment

Equipment Note
Fan See Spare parts on page 317.
Heat exchange unit See Spare parts on page 317.
Standard toolkit The contents are defined in section Standard
toolkit, IRC5 on page 315.
Other tools and procedures may be re- These procedures include references to the
quired. See references to these procedures tools required.
in the step-by-step instructions below.
Circuit diagram See Circuit diagrams on page 337.

Continues on next page


228 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.6 Replacement of heat exchange unit and fan
Continued

Removal of heat exchanger fan


The procedure below details how to remove the heat exchange unit fan.
Action Note/illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet, dis-


connect the mains power. For more informa-
tion, see Electrical safety on page 35.

2 Remove the attachment screws on the top


cover.
3 Remove the top cover. Shown in the figure above.
4 Disconnect the connector to the fan.
5 Remove the screw (item B in image below).
6 Push the fan upwards, and pull it out.

xx0500001954

• A: fan
• B: screw

Refitting of heat exchanger fan


The procedure below details how to refit the heat exchange unit fan.
Action Note/illustration
1 Put the new fan in place, and push down.

xx0500001954

• A: fan
• B: screw
2 Refit the screw (item B in image above).
3 Reconnect the connector to fan.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 229
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.6 Replacement of heat exchange unit and fan
Continued

Action Note/illustration
4 Refit the top cover.

xx0500001952

• A: fan
• B: heat exchanger
• C: top cover
• B: attachment screws (4 pcs)
5 Refit the attachment screws. Shown in the figure above.
6 Perform the function tests in section Function
tests on page 205 to verify that the safety fea-
tures work properly.

Removal of heat exchange unit


The procedure below details how to remove the heat exchange unit.
Action Note/illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet, dis-


connect the mains power. For more informa-
tion, see Electrical safety on page 35.

2 Follow step 2 through 5 in Removal of heat


exchanger fan on page 229.
3 Have one person holding the heat exchange
unit while another person unscrews the attach-
ment screws from inside the controller cabinet.

xx1000000973

• A: attachment screw for heat


exchange unit

Continues on next page


230 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.6 Replacement of heat exchange unit and fan
Continued

Refitting of heat exchange unit


The procedure below details how to refit the heat exchange unit.
Have one person hold the heat exchange unit in place while another person fits
the attachment screws from inside the controller cabinet.
Action Note/illustration
1 Hold the heat exchange unit against the control-
ler so that the screw holes in the heat exchange
unit are aligned with the holes in the controller
cabinet.

xx1000000974

• A: heat exchange unit


• B: screw holes
2 Fit the attachment screws through the holes in
the controller cabinet and screw them into the
heat exchange unit.

xx1000000973

• A: holes in the controller cabinet


for attaching the heat exchange
unit
3 Follow the step 1 to 4 in Refitting of heat ex-
changer fan on page 229.
4 Perform the function tests in section Function
tests on page 205 to verify that the safety fea-
tures work properly.

Product manual - IRC5 231


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.7 Replacement of computer unit

4.7 Replacement of computer unit

Location
The computer unit is located as shown in the illustration below.

A B C D E

xx1300000679

A Operator’s panel
B Computer unit
C Drive system
D Axis computer
E Panel board unit

Required equipment

Equipment Note
Computer unit See Spare parts on page 317.
Standard toolkit The contents are defined in section Standard
toolkit.
Other tools and procedures may be required. These procedures include references to the
See references to these procedures in the tools required.
step-by-step instructions below.
Circuit diagram See Circuit diagrams on page 337.

Continues on next page


232 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.7 Replacement of computer unit
Continued

Removal
The procedure below details how to remove the computer unit.

Note

If possible, do a backup of the system before removing the computer unit. For
information on how to do a backup see Operating manual - IRC5 with
FlexPendant.

Action Note/illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet,


disconnect the mains power. For more inform-
ation, see Electrical safety on page 35.

2
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
(ESD)

The unit is sensitive to ESD. Before handling


the unit read the safety information in section
The unit is sensitive to ESD on page 47.

3 Disconnect all connectors from the computer


unit. Tip

Make a note of the connections.

4 The computer unit is suspended by attach-


ment screws to the left, and latches to the
right.

xx1300000683

A Attachment screws
B Latches
5 Loosen the attachment screws.

xx1300000681

A Attachment screws

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 233
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.7 Replacement of computer unit
Continued

Action Note/illustration
6 Support the computer unit beneath by hand
and pull the computer unit in the arrow direc-
tion.

xx1300000682

WARNING

Prevent the computer unit from falling


down due to gravity by supporting the
computer unit from beneath by hand.

Refitting
The procedure below describes how to refit the computer unit.

Note

After replacing the main computer, the RobotWare system can be reset. It is then
necessary to restore a backup. For information on how to restore a backup see
Operating manual - IRC5 with FlexPendant.

Action Note/illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet,


disconnect the mains power. For more inform-
ation, see Electrical safety on page 35.

2
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
(ESD)

The unit is sensitive to ESD. Before handling


the unit read the safety information in section
The unit is sensitive to ESD on page 47.

Continues on next page


234 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.7 Replacement of computer unit
Continued

Action Note/illustration
3 The computer unit is suspended by attach-
ment screws to the left, and latches to the
right.

xx1300000683

A Attachment screws
B Latches
4 Fit the computer unit in position.
5 Tighten the attachment screws.

xx1300000681

A Attachment screws
6 Reconnect all connectors to the computer
unit.
7 Perform the function tests in section Function
tests on page 205 to verify that the safety
features work properly.

Product manual - IRC5 235


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.8 Replacement of PCIexpress boards in the computer unit

4.8 Replacement of PCIexpress boards in the computer unit

Location
The following PCIexpress boards may be fitted in the slots in the computer unit as
shown in the figure below:
• DeviceNet Master/Slave
• PROFIBUS-DP Master
• Safety module (second generation SafeMove safety controller)

xx1500001760

A Safety module DSQC1015


B PCIexpress slot for other devices.

Required equipment

Equipment Art. no. Note


Profibus-DP Master 3HAC044872-001 DSQC1005
Profibus communication is de-
scribed in Application manu-
al - PROFIBUS Controller.
DeviceNet Master/Slave 3HAC043383-001 DSQC1006
DeviceNet communication is de-
scribed in Application manual - Devi-
ceNet Master/Slave.
Safety module 3HAC048858-001 DSQC1015
SafeMove (2nd generation) is de-
scribed in Application manual - Func-
tional safety and SafeMove2.
Standard toolkit The contents are described in sec-
tion Standard toolkit, IRC5 on
page 315.

Continues on next page


236 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.8 Replacement of PCIexpress boards in the computer unit
Continued

Equipment Art. no. Note


Other tools and procedures may These procedures include refer-
be required. See references to ences to tools required.
these procedures in the step-by-
step instructions below.

References

Equipment Art. no. Note


Application manual - PROFIBUS 3HAC050966-001 Contains information on how to
Controller configure the system for PROFIBUS
devices.
Application manual - DeviceNet 3HAC050992-001 Contains information on how to
Master/Slave configure the system for DeviceNet
devices.
Circuit diagram See Circuit dia-
grams on page 337.

Removal
The procedure below details how to remove a PCIexpress board.
Action Note/Illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet,


disconnect the mains power. For more in-
formation, see Electrical safety on page 35.

2
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
(ESD)

The unit is sensitive to ESD. Before hand-


ling the unit read the safety information in
section The unit is sensitive to ESD on
page 47.

3 Disconnect any cables to/from the PCIex-


press board. Tip

Make a note of which cables are disconnec-


ted.

4 Open the computer unit by removing the


attachment screws and lift off the upper
cover. Disconnect the fan connector.

CAUTION

Be careful with the fan cable when opening


A
and removing the upper cover. The fan
B
cable must not be stretched.

xx1300000684

A Attachment screws (4 pcs.)


B Upper cover

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 237
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.8 Replacement of PCIexpress boards in the computer unit
Continued

Action Note/Illustration
5 Remove the attachment screw on top of
the PCIexpress board bracket.

B
A

xx1300000685

A Attachment screw
B PCIexpress board
6 Gently pull the board straight out.
CAUTION

Always grip the board around the edges to


avoid damage to the board or its compon-
ents.

CAUTION

Immediately put the board in an ESD safe


bag or similar.

Refitting
The procedure below details how to refit a PCIexpress board.
Action Note/Illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet,


disconnect the mains power. For more in-
formation, see Electrical safety on page 35.

2
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
(ESD)

The unit is sensitive to ESD. Before hand-


ling the unit read the safety information in
section The unit is sensitive to ESD on
page 47.

Continues on next page


238 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.8 Replacement of PCIexpress boards in the computer unit
Continued

Action Note/Illustration
3 Fit the PCIexpress board in position by
pushing the PCIexpress board into the
socket on the motherboard.

B
A

xx1300000685

A Attachment screw
B PCIexpress board

CAUTION

Always grip the board around the edges to


avoid damage to the board or its compon-
ents.

4 Refit the attachment screw on top of the


PCIexpress board bracket.
5 Reconnect any additional cables to the
PCIexpress board.
6 Refit the fan connector and close the com-
puter unit.

CAUTION

Be careful with the fan cable when closing


the upper cover. The fan cable must not be
A
squeezed.
B

xx1300000684

A Attachment screws (4 pcs.)


B Upper cover
7 Make sure the robot system is configured
to support the installed PCIexpress board.
8 Perform the function tests in section
Function tests on page 205 to verify that the
safety features work properly.

Product manual - IRC5 239


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.9 Replacement of expansion board in the computer unit

4.9 Replacement of expansion board in the computer unit

Location
To connect a serial channel or a fieldbus adapter to the controller, the main
computer must be equipped with the expansion board DSQC1003.
The expansion board is located in the computer unit as shown below.

xx1300000860

A Expansion board with serial channel and one slot for AnybusCC fieldbus adapter.

Required equipment

Equipment Art. no. Note


Expansion Board 3HAC046408-001 DSQC1003
Standard toolkit The contents are described in
section Standard toolkit, IRC5 on
page 315.

Removal
The following procedure describes how to remove the expansion board from the
computer unit.
Action Note/Illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet,


disconnect the mains power. For more in-
formation, see Electrical safety on page 35.

Continues on next page


240 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.9 Replacement of expansion board in the computer unit
Continued

Action Note/Illustration
2
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
(ESD)

The unit is sensitive to ESD. Before hand-


ling the unit read the safety information in
section The unit is sensitive to ESD on
page 47.

3 Disconnect any cables to/from the fieldbus


adapter.
4 Open the computer unit by removing the
attachment screws and lift off the upper
cover. Disconnect the fan connector.

CAUTION

Be careful with the fan cable when opening


A
and removing the upper cover. The fan
B
cable must not be stretched.

xx1300000684

A Attachment screws (4 pcs.)


B Upper cover
5 If there is a fieldbus adapter, remove it. See Replacement of fieldbus adapter in
the computer unit on page 243.
6 Remove the attachment screws on the
computer unit.

xx1300000859

A Attachment screws (2 pcs)


7 Grip the expansion board and gently pull
it straight out. CAUTION

Always grip the expansion board around


the edges to avoid damage to the board
or its components.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 241
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.9 Replacement of expansion board in the computer unit
Continued

Refitting
The following procedure describes how to refit the expansion board in the computer
unit.
Action Note/Illustrator
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet,


disconnect the mains power. For more
information, see Electrical safety on
page 35.

2
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
(ESD)

The unit is sensitive to ESD. Before


handling the unit read the safety inform-
ation in section The unit is sensitive to
ESD on page 47.

3 Fit the expansion board in position by


pushing the expansion board into the CAUTION
connector on the motherboard.
Always grip the expansion board around the
CAUTION edges to avoid damage to the board or its
components.
Push carefully so no pins are damaged.
Make sure that the expansion board is
pushed straight into the connector.

4 Secure the expansion board in the com-


puter unit with the attachment screws.
5 Refit the fan connector and close the
computer unit.

CAUTION

Be careful with the fan cable when clos-


ing the upper cover. The fan cable must
not be squeezed.

6 Reconnect any cable to the fieldbus ad-


apter.
7 Perform the function tests in section
Function tests on page 205 to verify that
the safety features work properly.

242 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.10 Replacement of fieldbus adapter in the computer unit

4.10 Replacement of fieldbus adapter in the computer unit

Location
One of the following fieldbus adapters may be fitted in the slot in the computer unit
as shown in the figure below:
• AnybusCC EtherNet/IP slave
• AnybusCC PROFIBUS slave
• AnybusCC PROFINET slave
• AnybusCC DeviceNet slave

xx1300000604

A Slot for AnybusCC fieldbus adapters

Required equipment

Equipment Art. no. Note


AnybusCC EtherNet/IP slave 3HAC027652-001 DSQC 669
fieldbus adapter Ethernet/IP communication is de-
scribed in Application manual - Eth-
erNet/IP Anybus Adapter
AnybusCC PROFIBUS slave 3HAC026840-001 DSQC 667
fieldbus adapter PROFIBUS communication is de-
scribed in Application manu-
al - PROFIBUS Anybus Device
AnybusCC PROFINET slave 3HAC031670-001 DSQC 688
fieldbus adapter PROFINET communication is de-
scribed in Application manu-
al - PROFINET Anybus Device

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 243
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.10 Replacement of fieldbus adapter in the computer unit
Continued

Equipment Art. no. Note


AnybusCC DeviceNet slave 3HAC045973-001 DSQC1004
fieldbus adapter DeviceNet communication is de-
scribed in Application manu-
al - DeviceNet Anybus Slave.
Standard toolkit The contents are described in
section Standard toolkit, IRC5 on
page 315.

References

Equipment Art. no. Note


Application manual - EtherNet/IP 3HAC050997-001 Contains information on how to
Anybus Adapter configure the system for Ether-
net/IP Fieldbus Adapter DSQC 669.
Application manual - PROFIBUS 3HAC050965-001 Contains information on how to
Anybus Device configure the system for PROFIB-
US Fieldbus Adapter DSQC 667.
Application manual - PROFINET 3HAC050968-001 Contains information on how to
Anybus Device configure the system for
PROFINET Fieldbus Adapter
DSQC 688.
Application manual - DeviceNet 3HAC050993-001 Contains information on how to
Anybus Slave configure the system for DeviceNet
Fieldbus Adapter DSQC1004.
Circuit diagram See Circuit diagrams
on page 337.

Removal
The following procedure details how to remove the fieldbus adapter from the
computer unit.
Action Note/Illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet,


disconnect the mains power. For more in-
formation, see Electrical safety on page 35.

2
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
(ESD)

The unit is sensitive to ESD. Before hand-


ling the unit read the safety information in
section The unit is sensitive to ESD on
page 47.

3 Disconnect any cables to/from the fieldbus


adapter.

Continues on next page


244 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.10 Replacement of fieldbus adapter in the computer unit
Continued

Action Note/Illustration
4 Loosen the attachment screws (2 pcs) on
front of the fieldbus adapter to release the
fastening mechanism.

Note

Only loosen the attachment screws. Do not


remove them.

xx0700000193

A Attachment screws (2 pcs)


B Fastening mechanism
5 Grip the loosened attachment screws and
gently pull the fieldbus adapter straight out.

A
xx1500001755

A Fieldbus adapter

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 245
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.10 Replacement of fieldbus adapter in the computer unit
Continued

Refitting
The following procedure details how to refit the fieldbus adapter in the computer
unit.
Action Note/Illustrator
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet,


disconnect the mains power. For more
information, see Electrical safety on
page 35.

2
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
(ESD)

The unit is sensitive to ESD. Before


handling the unit read the safety inform-
ation in section The unit is sensitive to
ESD on page 47.

3 Fit the fieldbus adapter in position by


pushing the fieldbus adapter along the
rails on the motherboard.

CAUTION

Push carefully so no pins are damaged.


Make sure that the adapter is pushed
straight onto the rails.

A
xx1500001755

A Fieldbus adapter

CAUTION

Always grip the fieldbus adapter around the


edges to avoid damage to the adapter or its
components.

Continues on next page


246 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.10 Replacement of fieldbus adapter in the computer unit
Continued

Action Note/Illustrator
4 Secure the fieldbus adapter with its at-
tachment screws (2 pcs).

xx0700000193

A Attachment screws (2 pcs)


B Fastening mechanism
5 Reconnect the cable to the fieldbus ad-
apter.
6 Make sure the robot system is configured
to reflect the fieldbus adapter installed.
7 Perform the function tests in section
Function tests on page 205 to verify that
the safety features work properly.

Product manual - IRC5 247


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.11 Replacement of fan in computer unit

4.11 Replacement of fan in computer unit

Location
The computer fan is located under the upper cover as shown in the figure below.

xx1300000687

Required equipment

Equipment Note
Fan See Spare parts on page 317.
Cable straps
Standard toolkit The contents are defined in section Standard
toolkit.
Other tools and procedures may be required. These procedures include references to the
See references to these procedures in the tools required.
step-by-step instructions below.
Circuit diagram See Circuit diagrams on page 337.

Removal
The procedure below details how to remove the fan in the computer unit.
Action Note/Illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet,


disconnect the mains power. For more in-
formation, see Electrical safety on page 35.

Continues on next page


248 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.11 Replacement of fan in computer unit
Continued

Action Note/Illustration
2
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
(ESD)

The unit is sensitive to ESD. Before hand-


ling the unit read the safety information in
section The unit is sensitive to ESD on
page 47.

C B A
3 Open the computer unit by removing the
upper cover attachment screws and lift off
the upper cover.

xx1300000688

A Upper cover attachment screws (4


pcs.)
B Fan attachment screw
C Upper cover
4 Disconnect the fan connector and remove
the cable straps. CAUTION

Be careful with the fan cable when opening


and removing the upper cover. The fan
cable must not be stretched.

5 Remove the fan attachment screw.


6 Remove the fan from the upper cover.

xx1300000806

Refitting
The procedure below details how to refit the fan in the computer unit.
Action Note/Illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet,


disconnect the mains power. For more in-
formation, see Electrical safety on page 35.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 249
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.11 Replacement of fan in computer unit
Continued

Action Note/Illustration
2
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
(ESD)

The unit is sensitive to ESD. Before hand-


ling the unit read the safety information in
section The unit is sensitive to ESD on
page 47.

3 Refit the fan on the upper cover.


4 Refit the attachment screw.
5 Strap the fan cable to the upper cover.
CAUTION

When strapping the cable make sure that


the cable is not stretched or squeezed, and
that the cable does not get caught in the
fan.

6 Refit the fan connector and close the com-


puter unit. CAUTION

Be careful with the fan cable when closing


the upper cover. The fan cable must not be
squeezed.

7 Perform the function tests in section


Function tests on page 205 to verify that the
safety features work properly.

250 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.12 Replacement of SD-card memory in computer unit

4.12 Replacement of SD-card memory in computer unit

Location
The location and orientation of the SD-card memory is shown by the following
illustration.

A B

xx1300000807

A Slot for SD-card memory


B SD-card memory

Note

Only use SD-card memory supplied by ABB.

Note

The SD-card from the computer unit DSQC1018 cannot be used in the computer
unit DSQC1024. Use the backup and restore function to move data from
DSQC1018 to DSQC1024.

CAUTION

Reformatting the SD-card or modifying the disk partition can cause irreparable
boot-up problems.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 251
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.12 Replacement of SD-card memory in computer unit
Continued

Required equipment

Equipment Note
SD-card 2GB See Spare parts on page 317.

Note

Only use SD-card memory supplied by


ABB.
Includes ABB Boot Application software
to correctly reboot the robot controller.

Standard toolkit The content is described in section


Standard toolkit, IRC5 on page 315.

Removal
Use the following procedure to remove the SD-card memory.
Action
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet, disconnect the mains power. For more
information, see Electrical safety on page 35.

2
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD)

The unit is sensitive to ESD. Before handling the unit read the safety information
in section The unit is sensitive to ESD on page 47.

3 Gently push the SD-card memory with your finger until it clicks, and then pull it
straight out.

Refitting
Use the following procedure to refit the SD-card memory.
Action
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet, disconnect the mains power. For more in-
formation, see Electrical safety on page 35.

2
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD)

The unit is sensitive to ESD. Before handling the unit read the safety information in
section The unit is sensitive to ESD on page 47.

3
CAUTION

Make sure that the SD-card memory is correctly oriented before inserting it. Otherwise
the SD-card memory or the SD-card memory slot may be damaged.

Continues on next page


252 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.12 Replacement of SD-card memory in computer unit
Continued

Action
4 Gently push the SD-card memory with your finger until it clicks into place.
5 Perform the function tests in section Function tests on page 205 to verify that the safety
features work properly.

Product manual - IRC5 253


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.13 Replacement of drive units

4.13 Replacement of drive units

Location
The illustration shows the location of drive units in the controller.

A B C

D
xx1300000808

A Additional Rectifier Unit (only used for additional axes in combination with small
robots)
B Main Drive Unit for small robots
C Main Drive Unit for large robots
D Additional Drive Units (for additional axes)

Configuration
The drive units exist in a number of versions, these are described in section
Configuration of the drive system on page 112.

Required equipment

Equipment Note
Drive units Specified in section Configuration of the
drive system on page 112.
Standard toolkit The contents are defined in section
Standard toolkit, IRC5 on page 315.
Other tools and procedures may be required. These procedures include references to
See references to these procedures in the step- the tools required.
by-step instructions below.
Circuit diagram See Circuit diagrams on page 337.

Continues on next page


254 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.13 Replacement of drive units
Continued

Removal
The procedure below describes how to remove the Main Drive Unit and the
Additional Drive Units. If your drive system contains an Additional Rectifier Unit,
it is replaced in a similar way.
Action Note/Illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet,


disconnect the mains power. For more
information, see Electrical safety on
page 35.

2 If an EPS or SafeMove board (option See Replacement of EPS board DSQC 646
Electronic Position Switches or Safe- for Electronic Position Switches on page 259
Move) is mounted, the Axis computer or Replacement of SafeMove board DSQC
unit must be removed before removal of 647 on page 263.
the Main Drive Unit.
3 Disconnect all connectors from the unit
to be replaced.
4 Remove the drive unit after unscrewing
its attachment screws.

xx0900000025

Parts:
• A: Main Drive Unit
• B: Attachment screws for MDU
• C: Additional Drive Unit
• D: Attachment screws for ADU

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 255
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.13 Replacement of drive units
Continued

Refitting
The procedure below describes how to refit the drive units.
Action Note/Illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet,


disconnect the mains power. For more
information, see Electrical safety on
page 35.

CAUTION

If the controller is equipped with temper-


ature sensor controlled fans, remove the
sensors before fitting an MDU. See Re-
placement of sensors for the drive sys-
tem fans on page 279.
If the MDU is fitted with the sensors still
in place at the back wall of the cabinet, A
the sensor holders will be bent and the
sensors will measure the temperature in
the wrong place. This will result in too
high temperature in the controller cabinet xx1500000859
and shorter life time for the components.
A Temperature sensors
2 Fit the unit in its intended position and
orientation. Secure it with its attachment
screws.
3 Reconnect any connectors disconnected
at removal.
4 Refit the Axis computer unit if it was re-
moved before the drive unit was re-
moved.
5 Perform the function tests in section
Function tests on page 205 to verify that
the safety features work properly.

256 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.14 Replacement of Axis computer

4.14 Replacement of Axis computer

Location
The illustration below shows the location of the axis computer in the controller.

xx1300000809

A Axis computer

Removal
The procedure below details how to remove the axis computer.
Action Note/Illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet, discon-


nect the mains power. For more information, see
Electrical safety on page 35.

2
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD)

The unit is sensitive to ESD. Before handling the


unit read the safety information in section The
unit is sensitive to ESD on page 47.

3 Disconnect all connectors from the axis com-


puter. Tip

Make a note of the connections.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 257
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.14 Replacement of Axis computer
Continued

Action Note/Illustration
4 Remove the attachment screws.

xx0900000030

• A: axis computer
• B: attachment screws
5 Remove the axis computer.

Refitting
The procedure below details how to refit the axis computer.
Action
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet, disconnect the mains power. For more in-
formation, see Electrical safety on page 35.

2 Fit the new axis computer.


3 Refit the attachment screws.
4 Reconnect all the connectors.
5 Perform the function tests in section Function tests on page 205 to verify that the safety
features work properly.

258 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.15 Replacement of EPS board DSQC 646 for Electronic Position Switches

4.15 Replacement of EPS board DSQC 646 for Electronic Position Switches

General
An Electronic Position Switches safety controller, EPS board, is mounted if the
option Electronic Position Switches is used.

Note

After replacement of the safety controller, the Electronic Position Switches


configuration must be downloaded to the new safety controller and then validated.
For more information, see Application manual - Electronic Position Switches.

Location
The EPS board is mounted behind the axis computer.

xx1300000810

A EPS board
B Axis computer

Removal

Action Note/illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet,


disconnect the mains power. For more in-
formation, see Electrical safety on page 35.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 259
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.15 Replacement of EPS board DSQC 646 for Electronic Position Switches
Continued

Action Note/illustration
2
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
(ESD)

The unit is sensitive to ESD. Before hand-


ling the unit read the safety information in
section The unit is sensitive to ESD on
page 47.

3 Disconnect the following cables connected


to the EPS board and axis computer:
• Plug contact in I/O connector
• Power cables
• SMB cables
• Ethernet cables

C
D
xx0700000101

A: Plug contact in I/O connector


B: Power cables
C: SMB cables
D: Ethernet cables

Continues on next page


260 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.15 Replacement of EPS board DSQC 646 for Electronic Position Switches
Continued

Action Note/illustration
4 Remove the attachment screws of the axis
computer and remove the axis computer.

xx0900000030

• A: axis computer
• B: attachment screws
5 Remove the attachment screws of the EPS A
board and remove the EPS board.

B B

xx0600003204

• A: EPS board
• B: attachment screws

Refitting

Action Note/illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet,


disconnect the mains power. For more in-
formation, see Electrical safety on page 35.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 261
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.15 Replacement of EPS board DSQC 646 for Electronic Position Switches
Continued

Action Note/illustration
2
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
(ESD)

The unit is sensitive to ESD. Before handling


the unit read the safety information in sec-
tion The unit is sensitive to ESD on page 47.

3 If not already in place, fit the EMC strips on


the EPS board.

xx0700000087

4 Connect the short SMB cable and both Eth-


ernet cables to the EPS board before
mounting the board. These connections may
be difficult to reach once the board is
mounted.
The two Ethernet connectors on the EPS
board are interchangeable (it does not mat-
ter which is connected to the main computer
and which is connected to the axis com-
puter).

xx0600003303

5 Refit the EPS board and the axis computer.


6 Refit all the cables.
7 After replacement of the safety controller,
the EPS configuration must be downloaded
to the new safety controller and then valid-
ated. For more information, see Application
manual - Electronic Position Switches.
8 Perform the function tests in section Func-
tion tests on page 205 to verify that the basic
safety features (e.g. emergency stop) work
properly.

262 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.16 Replacement of SafeMove board DSQC 647

4.16 Replacement of SafeMove board DSQC 647

General
A SafeMove safety controller, SafeMove board, is mounted if the option SafeMove
is used.

Note

After replacement of the safety controller, the SafeMove configuration must be


downloaded to the new safety controller and then validated. For more information,
see Application manual - SafeMove1.

Location
The SafeMove board is mounted behind the axis computer.

xx1300000810

A SafeMove board
B Axis computer

Removal
The procedure below details how to remove the SafeMove board.
Action Note/illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet,


disconnect the mains power. For more in-
formation, see Electrical safety on page 35.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 263
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.16 Replacement of SafeMove board DSQC 647
Continued

Action Note/illustration
2
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
(ESD)

The unit is sensitive to ESD. Before hand-


ling the unit read the safety information in
section The unit is sensitive to ESD on
page 47.

3 Disconnect the cables connected to the


SafeMove board and the cables between
the SafeMove board and the axis com-
puter.
4 Remove the attachment screws of the axis
computer and remove the axis computer.

xx0900000030

• A: axis computer
• B: attachment screws (4 pcs)
5 Remove the attachment screws of the A
SafeMove board and remove the SafeMove
board.

B
B

xx0800000104

• A: SafeMove board
• B: attachment screws (4 pcs)

Continues on next page


264 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.16 Replacement of SafeMove board DSQC 647
Continued

Refitting
The procedure below details how to refit the SafeMove board.
Action Note/illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet,


disconnect the mains power. For more in-
formation, see Electrical safety on page 35.

2
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
(ESD)

The unit is sensitive to ESD. Before hand-


ling the unit read the safety information in
section The unit is sensitive to ESD on
page 47.

3 If not already in place, fit the EMC strips on


the SafeMove board.

xx0800000204

• A: EMC strips

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 265
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.16 Replacement of SafeMove board DSQC 647
Continued

Action Note/illustration
4 Connect both SMB cables and both Ether-
net cables to the SafeMove board before
mounting the board. These connections
may be difficult to reach once the board is
mounted.
The two Ethernet connectors on the Safe-
Move board are interchangeable (it does
not matter which is connected to the main
computer and which is connected to the
axis computer).

xx0800000103

• A: SMB1 cable
• B: SMB2 cable
• C: Ethernet cables
5 Refit the SafeMove board and the axis
computer.
6 Refit all cables.
7 After replacement of the safety controller,
the SafeMove configuration must be
downloaded to the new safety controller
and then validated. For more information,
see Application manual - SafeMove1.
8 Perform the function tests in section Func-
tion tests on page 205 to verify that the basic
safety features (e.g. emergency stop) work
properly.

266 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.17 Replacement of Safety module DSQC1015 for SafeMove

4.17 Replacement of Safety module DSQC1015 for SafeMove

Location
The Safety module DSQC1015 is a PCIexpress board that is located inside the
IRC5 main computer unit.

xx1500001760

A Safety module DSQC1015


B PCIexpress slot for other devices.

Required equipment

Equipment Note
DSQC1015 Safety module 3HAC048858-001
Standard toolkit The contents are defined in section Standard
toolkit, IRC5 on page 315.
Circuit diagram See Circuit diagrams on page 337.

Removing the Safety module

Action Note/Illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet,


disconnect the mains power. For more in-
formation, see Electrical safety on page 35.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 267
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.17 Replacement of Safety module DSQC1015 for SafeMove
Continued

Action Note/Illustration
2
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
(ESD)

The unit is sensitive to ESD. Before hand-


ling the unit read the safety information in
section The unit is sensitive to ESD on
page 47.

3 Open the computer unit by removing the


attachment screws and lift off the cover.
Disconnect the fan connector.

CAUTION

Be careful with the fan cable when opening


A
and removing the upper cover. The fan
B
cable must not be stretched.

xx1300000684

A Attachment screws (4 pcs.)


B Cover
4 Remove the attachment screw on top of
the slot bracket.
5 Remove the Safety module by pulling it out
of the socket on the motherboard.

A
B

xx1500001761

A Attachment screw
B Safety module

CAUTION

Always grip the board around the edges to


avoid damage to the board or its compon-
ents.

Refitting the Safety module

Action Note/Illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet,


disconnect the mains power. For more in-
formation, see Electrical safety on page 35.

Continues on next page


268 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.17 Replacement of Safety module DSQC1015 for SafeMove
Continued

Action Note/Illustration
2
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
(ESD)

The unit is sensitive to ESD. Before hand-


ling the unit read the safety information in
section The unit is sensitive to ESD on
page 47.

3 Fit the Safety module in position by push-


ing it into the socket on the motherboard.

A
B

xx1500001761

A Attachment screw
B Safety module

CAUTION

Always grip the board around the edges to


avoid damage to the board or its compon-
ents.

4 Refit the attachment screw on top of the


Safety module bracket.
5 Refit the fan connector and close the com-
puter unit.

CAUTION

Be careful with the fan cable when closing


the cover. The fan cable must not be
A
squeezed.
B

xx1300000684

A Attachment screws (4 pcs.)


B Cover
6 Perform the function tests in section
Function tests on page 205 to verify that the
basic safety features (e.g. emergency stop)
work properly.
7 Perform a synchronization. See Application manual - Functional safety
and SafeMove2.
8 Perform a Cyclic Brake Check. See Application manual - Functional safety
and SafeMove2.
9 Lock the SafeMove configuration file. See Application manual - Functional safety
and SafeMove2.

Product manual - IRC5 269


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.18 Replacement of Remote Service box

4.18 Replacement of Remote Service box

General
A Remote Service box is mounted in the controller if the option Remote Service is
used.

Location
The illustration below shows the Remote Service box in the controller.

xx1300000811

A Remote Service box

Required equipment

Equipment Note
Remote Service box DSQC 680
See Spare parts on page 317.
Standard toolkit The contents are defined in section Standard
toolkit.
Other tools and procedures may be required.
See references to these procedures in the
step-by-step instructions below.
Circuit diagram See Circuit diagrams on page 337.

Continues on next page


270 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.18 Replacement of Remote Service box
Continued

Removal
Use this procedure to remove the Remote Service box.
Action Note/illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet, dis-


connect the mains power. For more informa-
tion, see Electrical safety on page 35.

2
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD)

The unit is sensitive to ESD. Before handling


the unit read the safety information in section
The unit is sensitive to ESD on page 47.

3 Disconnect all connectors from the Remote


Service box.
4 Push the spring locks in the arrow direction
and lift the box out.

xx0800000091

• A: Spring lock

Refitting
Use this procedure to refit the Remote Service box.
Action Note/illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet, dis-


connect the mains power. For more informa-
tion, see Electrical safety on page 35.

2
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD)

The unit is sensitive to ESD. Before handling


the unit read the safety information in section
The unit is sensitive to ESD on page 47.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 271
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.18 Replacement of Remote Service box
Continued

Action Note/illustration
3 Fit the Remote Service box in position.

xx0800000092

4 Push the Remote Service box in the arrow dir-


ection until the spring locks snaps into position.

xx0800000093

5 Reconnect all connectors to the Remote Ser-


vice box.
6 Perform the function tests in section Function
tests on page 205 to verify that the safety fea-
tures work properly.

272 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.19 Replacement of Contactor Interface Board

4.19 Replacement of Contactor Interface Board

Location
The illustration below shows the location of the contactor interface board in the
controller.

C
D

xx0400001058

A MOTOR ON contactor K42


B MOTOR ON contactor K43
C Brake contactor
D Jumpers (3pcs)
E Contactor interface board

Required equipment

Equipment Note
Contactor Interface board DSQC 611
See Spare parts on page 317.
Standard toolkit The contents are defined in section
Standard toolkit.
Other tools and procedures may be required. See These procedures include references
references to these procedures in the step-by-step to the tools required.
instructions below.
Circuit diagram See Circuit diagrams on page 337.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 273
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.19 Replacement of Contactor Interface Board
Continued

Removal
The procedure below details how to remove the contactor board.
Action Note/Illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet,


disconnect the mains power. For more in-
formation, see Electrical safety on page 35.

2
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
(ESD)

The unit is sensitive to ESD. Before handling


the unit read the safety information in sec-
tion The unit is sensitive to ESD on page 47.

3 Disconnect all connectors.


Tip

Make a note of any connections.

4 Remove the attachment screws.

B
xx0400001062

• A: contactor interface board


• B: attachment screws
5 Remove the contactor interface board.
6 If SafeMove option is used, the plugs in the
limit switch override contact (X23) pin 1 and
4, must be moved to the new contactor inter-
face board.
Use a small flat pliers to remove the plugs.
A

xx0800000035

• A: plug (2 pcs)

Continues on next page


274 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.19 Replacement of Contactor Interface Board
Continued

Refitting
The procedure below details how to refit the contactor board.
Action Note/Illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet,


disconnect the mains power. For more in-
formation, see Electrical safety on page 35.

2
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
(ESD)

The unit is sensitive to ESD. Before handling


the unit read the safety information in section
The unit is sensitive to ESD on page 47.

3 If SafeMove is used, mount the plugs in the


limit switch override contact (X23) pin 1 and Note
4.
The limit switch override contact must be
plugged and not used when using Safe-
Move.

4 Refit the contactor interface board.


5 Refit the attachment screws.
6 Reconnect all connectors.
7 Perform the function tests in section Func-
tion tests on page 205 to verify that the safety
features work properly.

Product manual - IRC5 275


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.20 Replacement of drive system fans

4.20 Replacement of drive system fans

Location
The illustration below shows the location of the fan unit in the controller.

A
B

xx0500002011

A Fan (4 pcs)
B Cover
C Attachment screw (4 pcs)

Required equipment

Equipment Note
Fan See Spare parts on page 317.
Standard toolkit The contents are defined in section Standard
toolkit.
Other tools and procedures may be re- These procedures include references to the
quired. see references to these procedures tools required.
in the step-by-step instructions below.
Circuit diagram See Circuit diagrams on page 337.

Continues on next page


276 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.20 Replacement of drive system fans
Continued

Removal

Action Note /illustration


1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet,


disconnect the mains power. For more in-
formation, see Electrical safety on page 35.

2 Remove the moist dust filter magazine. How to remove the moist dust filter
(Option) magazine is detailed in section Replace-
ment of moist dust filter on page 197.
3 Loosen the four attachment screws to the
cover.
4 Remove the cover.
5 Disconnect the connector to the fan.
6 If the fan is temperature sensor controlled,
disconnect the sensor as described in Re-
placement of sensors for the drive system
fans on page 279.
7 Push the fan upwards and remove it.

xx0500002015

A Fan
B Latches
C Grooves

Refitting

Action Note/illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet,


disconnect the mains power. For more in-
formation, see Electrical safety on page 35.

2 If the fan is temperature sensor controlled,


fit the sensor and connect it as described
in Replacement of sensors for the drive
system fans on page 279.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 277
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.20 Replacement of drive system fans
Continued

Action Note/illustration
3 Reconnect the connector to the fan.
4 Refit the fan by placing the latches in the
back of the fan housing in the grooves.

xx0500002015

A Fan
B Latches
C Grooves
5 Refit the cover and the attachment screws.
6 Refit the moist dust filter magazine. (Op-
tion)
7 Perform the function tests in section
Function tests on page 205 to verify that the
safety features work properly.

278 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.21 Replacement of sensors for the drive system fans

4.21 Replacement of sensors for the drive system fans

Location
The illustration below shows the location of the drive system fan unit in the
controller.

A
B

xx0500002011

A Fan (up to 4 pcs)


B Cover
C Attachment screw (4 pcs)

Required equipment

Equipment Note
Temp sensor for drive system fans See Spare parts on page 317.
Standard toolkit The contents are defined in section Standard
toolkit.
Other tools and procedures may be re- These procedures include references to the
quired. See references to these procedures tools required.
in the step-by-step instructions below.
Circuit diagram See Circuit diagrams on page 337.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 279
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.21 Replacement of sensors for the drive system fans
Continued

Removal

Action Note /illustration


1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet,


disconnect the mains power. For more in-
formation, see Electrical safety on page 35.

2 Remove the moist dust filter magazine. How to remove the moist dust filter
(Option) magazine is detailed in section Replace-
ment of moist dust filter on page 197.
3 Loosen the four attachment screws to the
cover.
4 Remove the cover.
5 Disconnect the connectors to the fan.
A

xx1500000855

A Connectors
6 Slide the cable gland out of the indentation. A E D
B
C

xx1500000856

A Fan
B Latches
C Grooves
D Temp sensor cable
E Cable gland
7 Push the fan upwards and remove it.

Continues on next page


280 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.21 Replacement of sensors for the drive system fans
Continued

Action Note /illustration


8 Lift the sensor holder and remove it togeth- B
A
er with the sensor cable.

xx1500000857

A Sensor holder
B Sensor cable

Refitting

Action Note/illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet,


disconnect the mains power. For more in-
formation, see Electrical safety on
page 35.

2 Insert the sensor between the heat sink B C


fins in the middle. A

xx1500000858

A Sensor on sensor holder


B Sensor cable
C Fan channel bracket
3 Route the fan cable behind the fan channel
bracket.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 281
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.21 Replacement of sensors for the drive system fans
Continued

Action Note/illustration
4 Fit the sensor holder on the edge of the B
A
fan channel bracket.

xx1500000857

A Sensor holder
B Sensor cable
5 Refit the fan by placing the latches in the A E D
back of the fan housing into the grooves B
and press the fan down. C

xx1500000856

A Fan
B Latches
C Grooves
D Temp sensor cable
E Cable gland
6 Slide the cable gland into the indentation
in the fan housing. Gently pull the cable
so there is no slack on the cable between
the sensor and the cable gland.
7 Reconnect the connectors to the fan.
8 Refit the cover and the attachment screws.
9 Refit the moist dust filter magazine. (Op-
tion)
10 Perform the function tests in section
Function tests on page 205 to verify that
the safety features work properly.

282 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.22 Replacement of transformer unit

4.22 Replacement of transformer unit

Location
The illustration below shows the location of the transformer unit in the controller.

xx0500002028

A Transformer

Required equipment

Equipment Note
Transformer unit 13kVA, 6kVA, 4.2kVA, 1.2kVA
See Spare parts on page 317.
Standard toolkit The contents are defined in section Standard
toolkit
Circuit diagram See Circuit diagrams on page 337.

Removal
The following procedures details how to remove the transformer unit.
Action Note/illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet, dis-


connect the mains power. For more informa-
tion, see Electrical safety on page 35.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 283
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.22 Replacement of transformer unit
Continued

Action Note/illustration
2
WARNING

The transformer weighs between 15 and 40 kg,


use a hoist and lifting slings.

3 Remove the moist dust filter magazine. (Option) How to remove the moist dust filter
magazine is detailed in section Re-
placement of moist dust filter on
page 197.
4 Loosen the attachment screws.

xx0500002027

• A: attachment screw (4pcs)


• B: cover
5 Remove the cover.
6 Disconnect the two grounding wires (gnye,
blue).
7 Disconnect the mains power supply wires.
Note

Make a note of the terminal to which


each of the wires are connected. This
will facilitate reconnection to the same
terminal.

8 Remove the two transformer attachment


screws.

xx0500002032

• A: attachment screw (2pcs)

Continues on next page


284 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.22 Replacement of transformer unit
Continued

Action Note/illustration
9 Push the transformer unit side ways and lift it
out with lifting slings and a hoist.

xx0500002033

Refitting
The following procedure details how to refit the transformer unit.
Action
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet, disconnect the mains power. For more in-
formation, see Electrical safety on page 35.

2
WARNING

The transformer weighs between 15 and 40 kg, use a hoist and lifting slings.

3 Fit the new transformer in place with a hoist and lifting slings.
4 Refit the attachment screws.
5 Reconnect the mains power supply wires and grounding wires.
6 Refit the cover.
7 Refit the moist dust filter magazine. (Option)
8 Perform the function tests in section Function tests on page 205 to verify that the safety
features work properly.

Product manual - IRC5 285


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.23 Replacement of brake resistor bleeder

4.23 Replacement of brake resistor bleeder

Location
The illustration below shows the location of the brake resistor bleeder in the
controller (behind the cover).

xx0500002022

A Brake resistor bleeder (behind the cover, not visible).

Required equipment

Equipment Note
Brake resistor bleeder See Spare parts on page 317.
Standard toolkit The contents are defined in section Stand-
ard toolkit
Other tools and procedures may be required. These procedures include references to the
See references to these procedures in the tools required.
step-by-step instructions below.
Circuit diagram See Circuit diagrams on page 337.

Continues on next page


286 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.23 Replacement of brake resistor bleeder
Continued

Removal
The following procedure details how remove the brake resistor bleeder.
Action Note/illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet,


disconnect the mains power. For more
information, see Electrical safety on
page 35.

2 Remove the moist dust filter magazine. How to remove the moist dust filter magazine
(Option) is detailed in section Replacement of moist
dust filter on page 197.
3 Remove the covers in the back of the
controller.

xx0700000418

• A: top cover
• B: transformer cover
• C: attachment screw (8 pcs)
4
CAUTION

If the controller is equipped with temper-


ature sensor controlled fans, remove the
sensor at the bleeder before removing
the bleeder. See Replacement of sensors
for the drive system fans on page 279.
Attempting to remove the bleeder with
the sensor still in place will cause the
sensor holder to be bent and the sensor
will measure the temperature in the
wrong place. This will result in too high
temperature in the controller cabinet and
shorter life time for the components.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 287
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.23 Replacement of brake resistor bleeder
Continued

Action Note/illustration
5 Disconnect the two connectors from the
bleeder.

xx0500002020

• A: attachment screw (4 pcs)


• B: connectors
• C: brake resistor bleeder
• D: bleeder attachment screw (4 pcs)
6 Loosen the attachment screws for the
brake resistor bleeder.
7 Lift the bleeder slightly and push it in to
release the attachments.
8 Lift the bleeder straight up.
9 If the IRC5 controller uses an Additional
Rectifier Unit, an extra ARU bleeder is
mounted on the MDU bleeder. A A
Remove the attachment screws and re-
move the ARU bleeder from the MDU
B
bleeder.
Remove the mounting brackets for the
ARU bleeder.

C D

xx1000000030

• A: MDU bleeder
• B: ARU bleeder
• C: Attachment screws
• D: Mounting brackets for ARU bleeder

Continues on next page


288 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.23 Replacement of brake resistor bleeder
Continued

Refitting
The following procedure details how to refit the brake resistor bleeder.
Action Note/illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet,


disconnect the mains power. For more
information, see Electrical safety on
page 35.

2 If the IRC5 controller uses an Additional


Rectifier Unit, an extra ARU bleeder is
required. A A
Attach the mounting brackets for ARU
bleeder on the MDU bleeder.
B
Attach the ARU bleeder to the MDU
bleeder.

C D

xx1000000030

• A: MDU bleeder
• B: ARU bleeder
• C: Attachment screws
• D: Mounting brackets for ARU
bleeder

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 289
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.23 Replacement of brake resistor bleeder
Continued

Action Note/illustration
3 Slide the new bleeder in to place and fit
the attachment screws in the key hole at-
tachments.

xx0500002020

• A: attachment screw (4 pcs)


• B: connectors
• C: brake resistor bleeder
• D: bleeder attachment screw (4 pcs)
4 Tightening the four attachment screws.
5 Reconnect the connectors.
6 Refit the covers.
7 Refit the moist dust filter magazine. (Op-
tion)
8 Perform the function tests in section
Function tests on page 205 to verify that
the safety features work properly.

290 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.24 Replacement of Process Interface Board

4.24 Replacement of Process Interface Board

About the Process Interface Board


A Process Interface Board is mounted in the controller cabinet if option DispensePac
support is used.

Location
The illustration below shows the location of the Process Interface Board.

xx1300000812

A Process Interface Board

Required equipment

Equipment Note
Standard toolkit The contents are defined in section Standard toolkit

Removing the Process Interface Board

Action
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet, disconnect the mains power. For more in-
formation, see Electrical safety on page 35.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 291
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.24 Replacement of Process Interface Board
Continued

Action
2
WARNING

The unit is sensitive to ESD. Before handling the unit please read the safety information
in the section The unit is sensitive to ESD on page 47

3 Disconnect all connectors from the Process Interface Board.


4 Remove the 4 attachment screws and remove the board.

Refitting the Process Interface Board

Action
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet, disconnect the mains power. For more in-
formation, see Electrical safety on page 35.

2
WARNING

The unit is sensitive to ESD. Before handling the unit please read the safety information
in the section The unit is sensitive to ESD on page 47

3 Fit the Process Interface Board on the attachment plate and fasten it with the 4 attach-
ment screws.
4 Connect all connectors to the Process Interface Board.
5 Perform the function tests in section Function tests on page 205 to verify that the safety
features work properly.

292 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.25 Replacement of Ethernet switch

4.25 Replacement of Ethernet switch

General
For some options an Ethernet switch is mounted in the controller.

Location
The illustration below shows the location of the Ethernet switch.

xx1300000814

B Ethernet switch

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 293
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.25 Replacement of Ethernet switch
Continued

Removing the switch

Action
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet, disconnect the mains power. For more in-
formation, see Electrical safety on page 35.

2
WARNING

The unit is sensitive to ESD. Before handling the unit please read the safety information
in the section The unit is sensitive to ESD on page 47

3 Disconnect all connectors from the switch.


4 Pull the spring lock to remove the switch.

Refitting the switch

Action
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet, disconnect the mains power. For more in-
formation, see Electrical safety on page 35.

2
WARNING

The unit is sensitive to ESD. Before handling the unit please read the safety information
in the section The unit is sensitive to ESD on page 47

3 Pull the spring lock and attach the switch to the mounting bar.
4 Connect all connectors to the switch.
5 Perform the function tests in section Function tests on page 205 to verify that the safety
features work properly.

294 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.26.1 Replacement of power distribution unit

4.26 Replacement of power supply

4.26.1 Replacement of power distribution unit

Location
The power distribution unit, DSQC 662, is located on the left side as shown in the
illustration below.

xx1300000813

A Customer I/O power supply


B Power distribution unit
C System power supply

CAUTION

Hot surface on top of the power distribution unit.


Risk of burns. Be careful when removing the unit.
Do not route or place cables on top of the power distribution unit.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 295
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.26.1 Replacement of power distribution unit
Continued

Required equipment

Equipment Article number Note


Power distribution unit 3HAC026254-001 DSQC 662
Standard toolkit The contents are defined in
section Standard toolkit.
Other tools and procedures
may be required. See refer-
ences to these procedures in
the step-by-step instructions
below.
Circuit diagram See Circuit diagrams on
page 337.

Removal
The procedure below details how to remove the power distribution unit.
Action Note/Illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet,


disconnect the mains power. For more
information, see Electrical safety on
page 35.

2
CAUTION

Hot surface on top of the power distribu-


tion unit.
Risk of burns. Be careful when removing
the unit.

3 Disconnect the connectors X1 - X9 on the


power distribution unit.
4 Loosen the left attachment screw, remove
the right attachment screw and pull the
power distribution unit rightward to re-
lease it from the left screw head.

xx0700000122

• A: left attachment screw


• B: right attachment screw
5 Remove the power distribution unit.

Continues on next page


296 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.26.1 Replacement of power distribution unit
Continued

Refitting
The procedure below details how to refit the power distribution unit.
Action Note/Illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet,


disconnect the mains power. For more in-
formation, see Electrical safety on
page 35.

2 Refit the new power distribution unit by


pushing it leftward to fit the left screw
head.
Refit the right screw.
3 Lock the unit in place by tighten the attach-
ment screws.
4 Reconnect the connectors X1 - X9.
CAUTION

Hot surface on top of the power distribution


unit.
Do not route or place cables on top of the
power distribution unit.

5 Perform the function tests in section


Function tests on page 205 to verify that
the safety features work properly.

Product manual - IRC5 297


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.26.2 Replacement of customer I/O power supply

4.26.2 Replacement of customer I/O power supply

Location
The customer I/O power supply, DSQC 609, is located as shown in the figure below.

xx1300000813

A Customer I/O power supply


B Power distribution unit
C System power supply

CAUTION

If there are two or more Customer I/O power supply units mounted in a row and
too close to each other, there will be a heating problem and the units can be
damaged.
To avoid damaging the Customer I/O power supply units, the units must be
separated with 3 pcs of exterior support.

Required equipment

Equipment Article number Note


Customer I/O power supply 3HAC14178-1 DSQC 609

Continues on next page


298 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.26.2 Replacement of customer I/O power supply
Continued

Equipment Article number Note


Standard toolkit The contents are defined in
section Standard toolkit.
Other tools and procedures These procedures include
may be required. See refer- references to the tools re-
ences to these procedures in quired.
the step-by-step instructions
below.
Circuit diagram See Circuit diagrams on
page 337.

Removal
The procedure below details how to remove the customer I/O power supply.
Action Note/Illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet, discon-


nect the mains power. For more information, see
Electrical safety on page 35.

2 Remove the Flange disconnect unit (option). Detailed in section Replacement


of Flange disconnect on page 221
3 Loosen the terminal screws for each connected
wire. Remove wires from the terminals.
4 Loosen the DIN-lock fixing screw.

xx0700000124

• A: DIN-lock fixing screw


• B: DIN-lock lever
5 Pull the DIN-lock lever downwards to release the
power supply unit.
6 Remove the power supply unit.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 299
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.26.2 Replacement of customer I/O power supply
Continued

Refitting
The procedure below details how to refit the customer I/O power supply.
Action Note/Illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet, discon-


nect the mains power. For more information, see
Electrical safety on page 35.

2 Refit the new power supply unit on the DIN-rail.


3 Fasten the DIN-lock fixing screw.

xx0700000124

• A: DIN-lock fixing screw


• B: DIN-lock lever
4 Refit all wires in the screw terminals.
5 Fasten the screw terminal screws with correct
torque.
6 Refit the Flange disconnect unit (option).
7 Perform the function tests in section Function tests
on page 205 to verify that the safety features work
properly.

300 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.26.3 Replacement of system power supply

4.26.3 Replacement of system power supply

Location
The illustration below shows the location of the system power supply, DSQC 661,
in the controller.

xx1300000813

A Customer I/O power supply


B Power distribution unit
C System power supply

Required equipment

Equipment Article number Note


System power supply 3HAC026253-001 DSQC 661
Standard toolkit The contents are defined in
section Standard toolkit.
Other tools and procedures
may be required. See refer-
ences to these procedures in
the step-by-step instructions
below.
Circuit diagram See Circuit diagrams on
page 337.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 301
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.26.3 Replacement of system power supply
Continued

Removal
The procedure below details how to remove the system power supply.
Action Note/Illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet, discon-


nect the mains power. For more information, see
Electrical safety on page 35.

2 Disconnect all connectors from the unit.


3 Loosen the two lower attachment screws.

xx0700000125

• A: upper attachment
screws
• B: lower attachment screws
4 Remove the two upper attachment screws.
5 Pull the power supply unit outwards and then up-
wards to release it from the lower screw heads, and
remove it.

Refitting
The procedure below details how to refit the system power supply.
Action Note/Illustration
1
DANGER

Before doing any work inside the cabinet, discon-


nect the mains power. For more information, see
Electrical safety on page 35.

Continues on next page


302 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.26.3 Replacement of system power supply
Continued

Action Note/Illustration
2 Refit the power supply by sliding the recesses in
beneath the lower screw heads, and push it inwards
and the downwards.

xx0700000125

• A: upper attachment
screws
• B: lower attachment screws
3 Refit the two upper attachment screws.
4 Tighten the attachment screws (4 pcs).
5 Reconnect all connectors to the unit.
6 Perform the function tests in section Function tests
on page 205 to verify that the safety features work
properly.

Product manual - IRC5 303


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
This page is intentionally left blank
5 Decommissioning
5.1 Introduction

5 Decommissioning
5.1 Introduction

Introduction
This section contains information to consider when taking a product, robot or
controller, out of operation.
It deals with how to handle potentially dangerous components and potentially
hazardous materials.

General
All used grease/oils and dead batteries must be disposed of in accordance with
the current legislation of the country in which the robot and the control unit are
installed.
If the robot or the control unit is partially or completely disposed of, the various
parts must be grouped together according to their nature (which is all iron together
and all plastic together), and disposed of accordingly. These parts must also be
disposed of in accordance with the current legislation of the country in which the
robot and control unit are installed.

Disposal of storage media


Before disposal of any storage equipment (anything from an SD card to a complete
controller), make sure that all sensitive information has been deleted.

Tip

To remove all data from the SD card, use the Clean Disk function (part of
Recovery Disk function) in RobotStudio. See Operating manual - RobotStudio.

Product manual - IRC5 305


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
5 Decommissioning
5.2 Environmental information

5.2 Environmental information

Introduction
ABB robots contain components in different materials. During decommissioning,
all materials should be dismantled, recycled, or reused responsibly, according to
the relevant laws and industrial standards. Robots or parts that can be reused or
upcycled helps to reduce the usage of natural resources.

Symbol
The following symbol indicates that the product must not be disposed of as common
garbage. Handle each product according to local regulations for the respective
content (see table below).

xx1800000058

Materials used in the product


The table specifies some of the materials in the product and their respective use
throughout the product.
Dispose components properly according to local regulations to prevent health or
environmental hazards.
Material Example application

Aluminium Heat sinks on power supplies and drive units


Batteries, Lithium Main computer
Brominated flame retardants Electronics
Copper Cables
Lead Electronics
Plastic/rubber Cables, connectors, etc.
Steel Cabinet structure, plates, screws, etc.

Continues on next page


306 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
5 Decommissioning
5.2 Environmental information
Continued

China RoHS symbol


The following symbol shows the information to hazardous substances and the
environmental protection use period of IRC5 according to "Management Methods
for the Restriction of the Use of Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic
Products (SJ/T 11364-2014) ".

xx1900000803

Green symbol with "e" in it: The product does not contain any hazardous substances
exceeding concentration limits and is a green environmentally friendly product
which can be recycled.

Product manual - IRC5 307


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
This page is intentionally left blank
6 Reference information
6.1 Introduction

6 Reference information
6.1 Introduction

General
This chapter includes general information, complementing the more specific
information in the different procedures in the manual.

Product manual - IRC5 309


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 Reference information
6.2 Applicable standards

6.2 Applicable standards

Note

The listed standards are valid at the time of the release of this document. Phased
out or replaced standards are removed from the list when needed.

General
The product is designed in accordance with ISO 10218-1:2011, Robots for industrial
environments - Safety requirements -Part 1 Robots, and applicable parts in the
normative references, as referred to from ISO 10218-1:2011. In case of deviations
from ISO 10218-1:2011, these are listed in the declaration of incorporation which
is part of the product delivery.

Normative standards as referred to from ISO 10218-1

Standard Description
ISO 9283:1998 Manipulating industrial robots - Performance criteria and related
test methods
ISO 10218-2 Robots and robotic devices - Safety requirements for industrial
robots - Part 2: Robot systems and integration
ISO 12100 Safety of machinery - General principles for design - Risk as-
sessment and risk reduction
ISO 13849-1:2006 Safety of machinery - Safety related parts of control systems
- Part 1: General principles for design
ISO 13850 Safety of machinery - Emergency stop - Principles for design
IEC 60204-1 Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of machines - Part
1: General requirements

Region specific standards and regulations

Standard Description
ANSI/RIA R15.06 Safety requirements for industrial robots and robot systems
ANSI/UL 1740 Safety standard for robots and robotic equipment
CAN/CSA Z 434-03 Industrial robots and robot Systems - General safety require-
ments

Other standards used in design

Standard Description
ISO 9787:2013 Robots and robotic devices -- Coordinate systems and motion
nomenclatures
IEC 61000-6-2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Part 6-2: Generic
standards – Immunity standard for industrial environments
IEC 61000-6-4 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Part 6-4: Generic
standards – Emission standard for industrial environments
ISO 13732-1:2006 Ergonomics of the thermal environment - Part 1
IEC 60974-1:2012 i Arc welding equipment - Part 1: Welding power sources

Continues on next page


310 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 Reference information
6.2 Applicable standards
Continued

Standard Description
IEC 60974-10:2014 i Arc welding equipment - Part 10: EMC requirements
ISO 14644-1:2015 ii Classification of air cleanliness
IEC 60529:1989 + A2:2013 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)
i Only valid for arc welding robots. Replaces IEC 61000-6-4 for arc welding robots.
ii Only robots with protection Clean Room.

Product manual - IRC5 311


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 Reference information
6.3 Unit conversion

6.3 Unit conversion

Converter table
Use the following table to convert units used in this manual.
Quantity Units
Length 1m 3.28 ft. 39.37 in
Weight 1 kg 2.21 lb.
Weight 1g 0.035 ounces
Pressure 1 bar 100 kPa 14.5 psi
Force 1N 0.225 lbf
Moment 1 Nm 0.738 lbf-ft
Volume 1L 0.264 US gal

312 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 Reference information
6.4 Screw joints

6.4 Screw joints

General
This section details how to tighten the various types of screw joints on the controller.
The instructions and torque values are valid for screw joints comprised of metallic
materials and do not apply to soft or brittle materials.

Tightening torque
Before tightening any screw, note the following:
• Determine whether a standard tightening torque or special torque is to be
applied. The standard torques are specified in the tables below. Any special
torques are specified in the Repair, Maintenance or Installation procedure
description. Any special torque specified overrides the standard value.
• Use the correct tightening torque for each type of screw joint.
• Only use correctly calibrated torque keys.
• Always tighten the joint by hand, and never use pneumatical tools.
• Use the correct tightening technique, i.e. do not jerk. Tighten the screw in a
slow, flowing motion.
• Maximum allowed total deviation from the specified value is 10%!
The table below specifies the recommended standard tightening torque for
oil-lubricated screws with slotted or cross-recess heads.
Dimension Tightening torque (Nm)
Class 4.8, oil-lubricated
M2.5 0.25
M3 0.5
M4 1.2
M5 2.5
M6 5.0

Product manual - IRC5 313


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 Reference information
6.5 Weight specifications

6.5 Weight specifications

Definition
In all repair and maintenance instructions, weights of the components handled are
sometimes specified. All components exceeding 22 kg (50 lbs) are high-lighted in
this way.
To avoid injury, ABB recommends the use of lifting equipment when handling
components with a weight exceeding 22 kg.

Example
Below is an example of how a weight specification is presented:

CAUTION

The transformer weighs 55 kg! All lifting equipment used must be sized
accordingly!

314 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 Reference information
6.6 Standard toolkit, IRC5

6.6 Standard toolkit, IRC5

General
All service (repair, maintenance and installation) instructions contain lists of tools
required to perform the specified activity. All special tools, that is, all tools that are
not considered as standard tools as defined below, are listed in their instructions
respectively.
This way, the tools required are the sum of the Standard Toolkit and any tools
listed in the instructions.

Contents, standard toolkit, IRC5

Tool Remark
Screw driver, Torx Tx10
Screw driver, Torx Tx20
Screw driver, Torx Tx25
Ball tipped screw driver, Torx Tx25
Screw driver, flat blade 4 mm
Screw driver, flat blade 8 mm
Screw driver, flat blade 12 mm
Screw driver Phillips-1
Box spanner 8 mm

Product manual - IRC5 315


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 Reference information
6.7 Lifting accessories and lifting instructions

6.7 Lifting accessories and lifting instructions

General
Many repair and maintenance activities require different pieces of lifting accessories,
which are specified in each procedure.
The use of each piece of lifting accessories is not detailed in the activity procedure,
but in the instruction delivered with each piece of lifting accessories.
The instructions delivered with the lifting accessories should be stored for later
reference.

316 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
7 Spare parts
7.1 Controller parts

7 Spare parts
7.1 Controller parts

Controller system parts


The illustration below shows the placement of the controller system parts in the
recommended spare part list.

I
K
P
J E

G L
H
F
O

C A D

B N M

xx1300000815

Spare part no. Description Type


A 3HAC035301-001 Main Drive Unit, MDU-430A (small robots) DSQC 406
B 3HAC029818-001 Main Drive Unit, MDU-790A (large robots) DSQC 663
C 3HAC035381-001 Additional Rectifier Unit, ARU-430A (small DSQC 417
robots with additional drive unit)

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 317
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
7 Spare parts
7.1 Controller parts
Continued

Spare part no. Description Type


D 3HAC030923-001 Additional Drive Unit, ADU-790A DSQC 664
E 3HAC024488-001 Panel board unit DSQC 643
F 3HAC029157-001 Axis computer DSQC 668
G 3HAC026254-001 Power distribution unit DSQC 662
H 3HAC026253-001 System power supply DSQC 661
I 3HAC14178-1 Customer I/O power supply DSQC 609
J 3HAC026585-001 Backup energy bank with adapter plate DSQC 655
J 3HAC025562-001 Backup energy bank DSQC 655
K 3HAC025466-001 Fan
L See Computer unit parts on page 321.
M 3HAC043053-001 Remote Service box DSQC 680
N 3HAC034884-001 Ethernet switch
O 3HAC13389-2 Contactor interface board DSQC 611
P 3HAC045976-001 DSQC1007 Eth. switch (MultiMove) DSQC1007
3HAC056289-001 Mains line filter
3HAC052287-002 Mode selector 3-pos Std
3HAC052287-004 Mode selector 3-pos Extended
3HAC052287-001 Mode selector 2-pos Std
3HAC052287-003 Mode selector 2-pos Extended
3HAC022165-002 Mains switch
3HAC026222-002 Handle
Option 744-1
3HAC026222-003 Handle
Standard
1SFA619550R1051 Emergency pushbutton
1SFA611102R1105 Actuator white
1SFA611605R1201 Contact block
3HAC17317-3 LED lamp
3HNE 01586-1 Conveyor Tracking Unit DSQC 377B
3HNA027579-001 CTM-01 Conveyor Tracking Module DSQC2000

Continues on next page


318 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
7 Spare parts
7.1 Controller parts
Continued

DeviceNet I/O System parts


The illustration below shows the placement of the DeviceNet I/O system parts in
the recommended spare part list.

A B

xx1300000816

Spare part no. Description Type


A 3HAC025784-001 ADCombi I/O unit DSQC 651
A 3HAC025917-001 Digital I/O unit DSQC 652
B 3HNA006144-001 Process Interface Board

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 319
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
7 Spare parts
7.1 Controller parts
Continued

Scalable I/O devices


The illustration below shows the base device and connected add-on devices.

xx1600002032

Spare part no. Description Type


3HAC058663-001 Digital base, 16 digital inputs, 16 di- DSQC1030
gital outputs
3HAC058664-001 Digital add-on, 16 digital inputs, 16 DSQC1031
digital outputs
3HAC058665-001 Analog add-on, 4 analog inputs, 4 DSQC1032
analog outputs
3HAC058666-001 Relay add-on, 8 digital inputs, 8 re- DSQC1033
lay outputs

The main dimensions for the I/O devices are 75x36x101 (Length x Width x Height).
Additional parts
Spare part no. Description
3HAC060919-001 Connectors digital base/add-on
3HAC060925-001 Connectors analog add-on
3HAC060926-001 Connectors relay add-on
3HAC062073-001 DIN bracket

Continues on next page


320 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
7 Spare parts
7.1 Controller parts
Continued

Computer unit parts


The illustration below shows the placement of the computer unit parts in the
recommended spare part list.

A B
xx1300000851

Spare part no. Description Type


A 3HAC042766-001 Computer unit (1 PCI slot) DSQC1000
A 3HAC050363-001 Computer unit (2 PCI slots) DSQC1018
A 3HAC058366-001 Computer unit (2 PCI slots) DSQC1024
Recommended for RobotWare 6.08
and later versions.
B 3HAC047184-003 Mass Memory with boot loader 2GB DSQC1008
Used with computer
DSQC1000/1018
B 3HAC061416-003 SD card Used with computer
DSQC1024
C 3HAC046408-001 Expansion Board complete DSQC1003
D 3HAC031670-001 PROFINET Slave Fieldbus Adapter DSQC 688
D 3HAC026840-001 PROFIBUS Slave Fieldbus Adapter DSQC 667
D 3HAC027652-001 Ethernet/IP Slave Fieldbus Adapter DSQC 669
D 3HAC045973-001 DeviceNet Slave Fieldbus Adapter DSQC1004
E 3HAC043383-001 DeviceNet Master/Slave PCIexpress DSQC1006
E 3HAC044872-001 PROFIBUS-DP Master PCIexpress DSQC1005
F 3HAC026525-001 Fan -
- 3HAC14944-1 RS-232/422 Converter DSQC 615

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 321
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
7 Spare parts
7.1 Controller parts
Continued

Miscellaneous parts
The illustration below shows the placement of the Miscellaneous parts in the
recommended spare part list.

xx0600002683

Spare part no. Description Note


C 3HAC037015-001 Transformer unit 400-480V 1.2kVA
C 3HAC037016-001 Transformer unit 200-220V 4.2kVA
C 3HAC037017-001 Transformer unit 400V 4.2kVA
C 3HAC037018-001 Transformer unit 440-600V 4.2kVA
C 3HAC024180-001 Transformer unit 200-600V 6kVA
C 3HAC024138-001 Transformer unit 200-600V 13kVA
A 3HAC038564-001 Heat exchange unit 52°C
D 3HAC035583-001 Bleeder 1.8 kW ass. Low voltage sys-
tems, IRB 120-
1600
3HAC032586-001 Bleeder Unit, 2 kW High voltage sys-
tems, IRB 2600-
7600
3HAC050878-001 Bleeder 4 kW ass. IRB 8700
B 3HAC029105-001 Fan 45°C/52°C
G 3HAC029105-001 Fan
G 3HAC054680-001 Sensor controlled fan Part of option
1170-1
3HAC054852-001 Temp sensor with sensor bracket for Part of option
sensor controlled fan 1170-1
E 3HAC027697-001 Moist dust filter Option
F 3HAC027641-001 Moist dust filter Option

322 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
7 Spare parts
7.2 FlexPendant parts

7.2 FlexPendant parts

FlexPendant parts

Article number Description


3HAC028357-001 FlexPendant with cable 10 m
3HAC031683-001 Cable 10 m for FlexPendant
3HAC031683-004 Cable 30 m for FlexPendant
3HAC055665-002 FlexPendant extension cable 15 m i
3HAC055665-003 FlexPendant extension cable 22 m i
3HAC055665-004 FlexPendant extension cable 30 m i
3HAC033498-001 FlexPendant holder
3HAC033596-002 FlexPendant holder upper part
i Cannot be used together with external operator's panel (option 733-3 or 733-4).

Product manual - IRC5 323


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
7 Spare parts
7.3.1 Manipulator cables

7.3 Manipulator cables

7.3.1 Manipulator cables

Signal cables, IRB 120

Art. no. Description Option no.


3HAC035320-001 Robot cable, signal 3 m 210-1
3HAC2493-1 Robot cable, signal 7 m 210-2
3HAC2530-1 Robot cable, signal 15 m 210-3

Signal cables, IRB 1200, 1410, 1520, 1600, 2600, 460, 4600, 6700, 8700

Art. no. Description Option no.


3HAC2493-1 Control cable signal 7 m 210-2
3HAC2530-1 Control cable signal 15 m 210-3
3HAC2540-1 Control cable signal 22 m 210-4
3HAC2566-1 Control cable signal 30 m 210-5

Signal cables, IRB 260, 660, 760, 2400, 4400, 6600, 6650, 6620, 6640, 6660, 6650S, 7600

Art. no. Description Option no.


3HAC7998-1 Control cable signal 7 m 210-2
3HAC7998-2 Control cable signal 15 m 210-3
3HAC7998-3 Control cable signal 22 m 210-4
3HAC7998-4 Control cable signal 30 m 210-5

Cable packages for IRB 140 (including signal, power and customer cables)

Art. no. Description Option no.


3HAC7996-1 Control cable power 3 m 210-1
3HAC7996-5 Control cable power 7 m 210-2
3HAC7996-6 Control cable power 15 m 210-3
3HAC7996-7 Control cable power 22 m 210-4
3HAC7996-8 Control cable power 30 m 210-5

Power cables, IRB 1410, 1600 (version A) 1

Art. no. Description Option no. i


3HAC2492-1 Control cable power 7 m Standard: 210-2 and 287-4
3HAC2529-1 Control cable power 15 m Standard: 210-3 and 287-4
3HAC2539-1 Control cable power 22 m Standard: 210-4 and 287-4
3HAC2564-1 Control cable power 30 m Standard: 210-5 and 287-4
1 IRB 1600/1660ID in standard protection has two versions, A and B. For details about the robot version, see product manual
for the robot.

Continues on next page


324 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
7 Spare parts
7.3.1 Manipulator cables
Continued

Art. no. Description Option no. i


3HAC9038-1 Control cable power 7 m Foundry: 210-2 and 287-3
Wash: 210-2 and 287-5
3HAC9038-2 Control cable power 15 m Foundry: 210-3 and 287-3
Wash: 210-3 and 287-5
3HAC9038-3 Control cable power 22 m Foundry: 210-4 and 287-3
Wash: 210-4 and 287-5
3HAC9038-4 Control cable power 30 m Foundry: 210-5 and 287-3
Wash: 210-5 and 287-5
i The option number depends on the protection type of the manipulator.

Power cables, IRB 1200, 1520

Art. no. Description Option no.


3HAC040503-007 Control cable power 3 m 210-1 (only for IRB 1200)
3HAC040503-001 Control cable power 7 m 210-2
3HAC040503-002 Control cable power 15 m 210-3
3HAC040503-003 Control cable power 22 m 210-4 (only for IRB 1200)
3HAC040503-004 Control cable power 30 m 210-5 (only for IRB 1200)

Power cables, IRB 120

Cable Art. no. Option no.


3HAC032694-001 Robot cable power 3 m 210-1
3HAC032695-001 Robot cable power 7 m 210-2
3HAC032696-001 Robot cable power 15 m 210-3

Power cables, IRB 260, 1600 (version B) 2

Art. no. Description Option no. i


3HAC9038-1 Control cable power 7 m Foundry: 210-2 and 287-3
Wash: 210-5 and 287-5
3HAC9038-2 Control cable power 15 m Foundry: 210-3 and 287-3
Wash: 210-5 and 287-5
3HAC9038-3 Control cable power 22 m Foundry: 210-4 and 287-3
Wash: 210-5 and 287-5
3HAC9038-4 Control cable power 30 m Foundry: 210-5 and 287-3
Wash: 210-5 and 287-5
i The option number depends on the protection type of the manipulator.

Power cables, IRB 360

Art. no. Description Option no.


3HAC029903-001 Control cable, power and signal 3 m (435-80 or 435-81 or 435-82)

2 IRB 1600/1660ID in standard protection has two versions, A and B. For details about the robot version, see product manual
for the robot.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 325
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
7 Spare parts
7.3.1 Manipulator cables
Continued

Art. no. Description Option no.


3HAC029903-002 Control cable, power and signal 7 m (435-80 or 435-81 or 435-82)
3HAC029903-003 Control cable, power and signal 15 m (435-80 or 435-81 or 435-82)
3HAC029903-004 Control cable, power and signal 22 m (435-80 or 435-81 or 435-82)
3HAC029903-005 Control cable, power and signal 30 m (435-80 or 435-81 or 435-82)
3HAC029903-007 Control cable, power and signal 50 m (435-80 or 435-81 or 435-82)
3HAC038411-001 Control cable, power and signal, (435-80 or 435-81 or 435-82)
stainless contact screws, 3 m
3HAC038411-002 Control cable, power and signal, (435-80 or 435-81 or 435-82)
stainless contact screws, 7 m
3HAC038411-003 Control cable, power and signal, (435-80 or 435-81 or 435-82)
stainless contact screws, 15 m
3HAC038411-004 Control cable, power and signal, (435-80 or 435-81 or 435-82)
stainless contact screws, 22 m
3HAC038411-005 Control cable, power and signal, (435-80 or 435-81 or 435-82)
stainless contact screws, 30 m
3HAC038411-006 Control cable, power and signal, (435-80 or 435-81 or 435-82)
stainless contact screws, 50 m

Power cable, IRB 2400

Note

Depending on whether the manipulator is built before or after 2018-05, the


connection interface differs and, the choice of manipulator cable must be made
accordingly. Check the interface and select cable according to the following
tables.

Before May 2018

Art. no. Description Option no. i


3HAC2492-1 Control cable power 7 m Standard: 210-2 and 287-4
3HAC2529-1 Control cable power 15 m Standard: 210-3 and 287-4
3HAC2839-1 Control cable power 22 m Standard: 210-4 and 287-4
3HAC2564-1 Control cable power 30 m Standard: 210-5 and 287-4
3HAC9038-1 Control cable power 7 m Foundry: 210-2 and 287-3
Wash: 210-5 and 287-5
3HAC9038-2 Control cable power 15 m Foundry: 210-3 and 287-3
Wash: 210-5 and 287-5
3HAC9038-3 Control cable power 22 m Foundry: 210-4 and 287-3
Wash: 210-5 and 287-5
3HAC9038-4 Control cable power 30 m Foundry: 210-5 and 287-3
Wash: 210-5 and 287-5
i The option number depends on the protection type of the manipulator.

Continues on next page


326 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
7 Spare parts
7.3.1 Manipulator cables
Continued

From May 2018

Art. no. Description Option no. i


3HAC9038-1 Control cable power 7 m Standard: 210-2 and 287-4
Foundry: 210-2 and 287-3
Wash: 210-5 and 287-5
3HAC9038-2 Control cable power 15 m Standard: 210-3 and 287-4
Foundry: 210-3 and 287-3
Wash: 210-5 and 287-5
3HAC9038-3 Control cable power 22 m Standard: 210-4 and 287-4
Foundry: 210-4 and 287-3
Wash: 210-5 and 287-5
3HAC9038-4 Control cable power 30 m Standard: 210-5 and 287-4
Foundry: 210-5 and 287-3
Wash: 210-5 and 287-5
i The option number depends on the protection type of the manipulator.

Power cables, IRB 4400

Art. no. Description Option no. i


3HAC2512-1 Control cable power 7 m Standard: 210-2 and 287-4
Clean room: 210-2 and 287-1
3HAC2535-1 Control cable power 15 m Standard: 210-3 and 287-4
Clean room: 210-3 and 287-1
3HAC2560-1 Control cable power 22 m Standard: 210-4 and 287-4
Clean room: 210-4 and 287-1
3HAC2572-1 Control cable power 30 m Standard: 210-5 and 287-4
Clean room: 210-5 and 287-1
3HAC8182-1 Control cable power 7 m Foundry: 210-2 and 287-3
Wash: 210-2 and 287-5
3HAC8182-2 Control cable power 15 m Foundry: 210-3 and 287-3
Wash: 210-3 and 287-5
3HAC8182-3 Control cable power 22 m Foundry: 210-4 and 287-3
Wash: 210-4 and 287-5
3HAC8182-4 Control cable power 30 m Foundry: 210-5 and 287-3
Wash: 210-5 and 287-5
i The option number depends on the protection type of the manipulator.

Power cable, IRB 460, 660, 760, 2600, 4600, 6600, 6620, 6640, 6650, 6650S, 6660, 6700, 7600, 8700

Art. no. Description Option no.


3HAC026787-001 Control cable power 7 m (435-6 or 435-18 or 435-24 or
435-36) and 210-2
3HAC026787-002 Control cable power 15 m (435-6 or 435-18 or 435-24 or
435-36) and 210-3
3HAC026787-003 Control cable power 22 m (435-6 or 435-18 or 435-24 or
435-36) and 210-4

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 327
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
7 Spare parts
7.3.1 Manipulator cables
Continued

Art. no. Description Option no.


3HAC026787-004 Control cable power 30 m (435-6 or 435-18 or 435-24 or
435-36) and 210-5

Note

IRB 8700 requires two power cables.

328 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
7 Spare parts
7.3.2 Fan cables

7.3.2 Fan cables

IRB 6600 and IRB 7600

Art. no. Description Option no.


3HAC022723-001 Harness - Axis 1&2 cooling (87-1 or 88-1 or 89-1) and
210-2
3HAC022723-004 Harness - Axis 1&2 cooling (87-1 or 88-1 or 89-1) and
210-3
3HAC022723-005 Harness - Axis 1&2 cooling (87-1 or 88-1 or 89-1) and
210-4
3HAC022723-006 Harness - Axis 1&2 cooling (87-1 or 88-1 or 89-1) and
210-5
3HAC022708-001 Harness - axis 1/2/3 cooling (87-1 or 88-1 or 89-1) and
274-1 or 274-2 or 274-3 or
274-4

Product manual - IRC5 329


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
7 Spare parts
7.3.3 CP/CS Harness

7.3.3 CP/CS Harness

CP/CS for IRB 2600, 460, 4600, 660, 6600, 6620, 6640, 6700, 760, 7600

Art. no. Description Option no.


3HAC022957-001 Harness CP/CS L=7m 94-1
3HAC022957-002 Harness CP/CS L=15m 94-2
3HAC022957-006 Harness CP/CS L=22m 94-3
3HAC022957-003 Harness CP/CS L=30m 94-4

CP/CS/Profibus for IRB 2600, 460, 4600, 660, 6600, 6620, 6640, 6700, 760, 7600

Art. no. Description Option no.


3HAC022988-001 Harness CP/CS, PROFIB L=7m 92-2
3HAC022988-002 Harness CP/CS, PROFIB L=15m 92-3
3HAC022988-006 Harness CP/CS, PROFIB L=22m 92-4
3HAC022988-003 Harness CP/CS, PROFIB L=30m 92-5

CP/CS DeviceNet for IRB 2600, 460, 4600, 660, 6600, 6620, 6640, 6700, 760, 7600

Art. no. Description Option no.


3HAC022978-001 Harness CP/CS, DeviceNet L=7m 90-2
3HAC022978-002 Harness CP/CS, DeviceNet L=15m 90-3
3HAC022978-006 Harness CP/CS, DeviceNet L=22m 90-4
3HAC022978-003 Harness CP/CS, DeviceNet L=30m 90-5

Ethernet/PROFINET cable for IRB 2600, 460, 4600, 660, 6600, 6620, 6640, 6700, 760, 7600, 8700

Art. no. Description Option no.


3HAC031924-001 Connection of Ethernet, L=7m 859-1
3HAC031924-002 Connection of Ethernet, L=15m 859-2
3HAC031924-003 Connection of Ethernet, L=22m 859-3
3HAC031924-004 Connection of Ethernet, L=30m 859-4

Ethernet/PROFINET cable for IRB 1200

Art. no. Description Option no.


3HAC055518-001 Connection of Ethernet, L=3m 859-9
3HAC055518-002 Connection of Ethernet, L=7m 859-1
3HAC055518-003 Connection of Ethernet, L=15m 859-2
3HAC055518-004 Connection of Ethernet, L=22m 859-3
3HAC055518-005 Connection of Ethernet, L=30m 859-4

330 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
7 Spare parts
7.3.4 Cables customer power/customer signal

7.3.4 Cables customer power/customer signal

IRB 120, 1200

Art. no. Description Option no.


3HAC049089-001 Cable CP/CS 3 m 16-1 and 94-6
3HAC049089-004 Cable CP/CS 7 m 16-1 and 94-1
3HAC049089-005 Cable CP/CS 15 m 16-1 and 94-2
3HAC049089-006 Cable CP/CS 22 m 16-1 and 94-3
3HAC049089-007 Cable CP/CS 30 m 16-1 and 94-4

IRB 1400

Art. no. Description Option no.


3HAC3346-1 Cable CP/CS 7 m 16-1 and 17-5 and 94-1
3HAC3347-1 Cable CP/CS 15 m 16-1 and 17-5 and 94-2
3HAC3348-1 Cable CP/CS 22 m 16-1 and 17-5 and 94-3
3HAC3349-1 Cable CP/CS 30 m 16-1 and 17-5 and 94-4

IRB 2400

Note

Depending on whether the manipulator is built before or after 2018-05, the


connection interface differs and, the choice of manipulator cable must be made
accordingly. Check the interface and select cable according to the following
tables.

Before May 2018

Art. no. Description Option no. i


3HAC3353-1 Cable CP/CS 7 m Standard: 94-1, 16-1 and 287-4
3HAC3354-1 Cable CP/CS 15 m Standard: 94-2, 16-1 and 287-4
3HAC3355-1 Cable CP/CS 22 m Standard: 94-3, 16-1 and 287-4
3HAC3356-1 Cable CP/CS 30 m Standard: 94-1, 16-1 and 287-4
3HAC8183-1 Cable CP/CS 7 m Foundry: 94-1, 16-1 and 287-3
Wash: 94-1, 16-1 and 287-5
3HAC8183-2 Cable CP/CS 15 m Foundry: 94-2, 16-1 and 287-3
Wash: 94-2, 16-1 and 287-5
3HAC8183-3 Cable CP/CS 22 m Foundry: 94-3, 16-1 and 287-3
Wash: 94-3, 16-1 and 287-5
3HAC8183-4 Cable CP/CS 30 m Foundry: 94-4, 16-1 and 287-3
Wash: 94-4, 16-1 and 287-5
i The option number depends on the protection type of the manipulator.

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 331
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
7 Spare parts
7.3.4 Cables customer power/customer signal
Continued

From May 2018

Art. no. Description Option no. i


3HAC8183-1 Cable CP/CS 7 m Standard: 94-1, 16-1 and 287-4
Foundry: 94-1, 16-1 and 287-3
Wash: 94-1, 16-1 and 287-5
3HAC8183-2 Cable CP/CS 15 m Standard: 94-2, 16-1 and 287-4
Foundry: 94-2, 16-1 and 287-3
Wash: 94-2, 16-1 and 287-5
3HAC8183-3 Cable CP/CS 22 m Standard: 94-3, 16-1 and 287-4
Foundry: 94-3, 16-1 and 287-3
Wash: 94-3, 16-1 and 287-5
3HAC8183-4 Cable CP/CS 30 m Standard: 94-4, 16-1 and 287-4
Foundry: 94-4, 16-1 and 287-3
Wash: 94-4, 16-1 and 287-5
i The option number depends on the protection type of the manipulator.

IRB 4400

Art. no. Description Option no. i


3HAC3353-1 Cable CP/CS 7 m Standard: 94-1, 16-1 and 287-4
Clean: 94-1, 16-1 and 287-1
3HAC3354-1 Cable CP/CS 15 m Standard: 94-2, 16-1 and 287-4
Clean: 94-2, 16-1 and 287-1
3HAC3355-1 Cable CP/CS 22 m Standard: 94-3, 16-1 and 287-4
Clean: 94-3, 16-1 and 287-1
3HAC3356-1 Cable CP/CS 30 m Standard: 94-4, 16-1 and 287-4
Clean: 94-4, 16-1 and 287-1
3HAC8183-1 Cable CP/CS 7 m Foundry: 94-1, 16-1 and 287-3
Wash: 94-1, 16-1 and 287-5
Foundry Prime: 94-1, 16-1 and 287-6
3HAC8183-2 Cable CP/CS 15 m Foundry: 94-2, 16-1 and 287-3
Wash: 94-2, 16-1 and 287-5
Foundry Prime: 94-2, 16-1 and 287-6
3HAC8183-3 Cable CP/CS 22 m Foundry: 94-3, 16-1 and 287-3
Wash: 94-3, 16-1 and 287-5
Foundry Prime: 94-3, 16-1 and 287-6
3HAC8183-4 Cable CP/CS 30 m Foundry: 94-4, 16-1 and 287-3
Wash: 94-4, 16-1 and 287-5
Foundry Prime: 94-4, 16-1 and 287-6
i The option number depends on the protection type of the manipulator.

IRB 1600

Art. no. Description Option no.


3HAC8183-1 Cable CP/CS 7 m 94-1, 16-1 and 17-5
3HAC8183-2 Cable CP/CS 15 m 94-2, 16-1 and 17-5

Continues on next page


332 Product manual - IRC5
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
7 Spare parts
7.3.4 Cables customer power/customer signal
Continued

Art. no. Description Option no.


3HAC8183-3 Cable CP/CS 22 m 94-3, 16-1 and 17-5
3HAC8183-4 Cable CP/CS 30 m 94-4, 16-1 and 17-5

IRB 260

Art. no. Description Option no.


3HAC8183-1 Cable CP/CS 7 m 94-1 and 16-1
3HAC8183-2 Cable CP/CS 15 m 94-2 and 16-1
3HAC8183-3 Cable CP/CS 22 m 94-3 and 16-1
3HAC8183-4 Cable CP/CS 30 m 94-4 and 16-1

IRB 360

Art. no. Description Option no. i


3HAC14860-1 Cable CP/CS 7 m 218-9 and 94-1
3HAC14860-2 Cable CP/CS 15 m 218-9 and 94-2
3HAC14860-3 Cable CP/CS 22 m 218-9 and 94-3
3HAC14860-4 Cable CP/CS 30 m 218-9 and 94-4
i The option number depends on the protection type of the manipulator.

Product manual - IRC5 333


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
7 Spare parts
7.3.5 Other customer cables

7.3.5 Other customer cables

IRB 360

Art. no. Description Option no. i


3HAC030198-001 Internal Customer cable 3 m 218-5 and 94-6
3HAC030198-002 Internal Customer cable 7 m 218-5 and 94-1
3HAC030198-003 Internal Customer cable 15 m 218-5 and 94-2
3HAC030198-004 Internal Customer cable 22 m 218-5 and 94-3
3HAC030198-005 Internal Customer cable 30 m 218-5 and 94-4
i The option number depends on the protection type of the manipulator.

Euromap cables

Art. no. Description Option no.


3HAC024328-001 Cable EMP67 10 m 671-2 and 673-1
3HAC024328-005 Cable EMP67 15 m 671-2 and 673-2
3HAC024330-001 Cable EMP12 10 m 671-1 and 673-1
3HAC024330-004 Cable EMP12 15 m 671-1 and 673-2

334 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
7 Spare parts
7.3.6 Additional cables

7.3.6 Additional cables

Drive module cables

Cable Art. no. Option no.


3HAC025600-001 Cable between control module and drive
module: L=1.7 m
3HAC025600-005 Cable between control module and drive 761-1
module: L=4 m
3HAC025600-006 Cable between control module and drive 761-3
module: L=30 m

Product manual - IRC5 335


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
This page is intentionally left blank
8 Circuit diagrams
8.1 Circuit diagrams

8 Circuit diagrams
8.1 Circuit diagrams

Overview
The circuit diagrams are not included in this manual, but are available for registered
users on myABB Business Portal, www.abb.com/myABB.
See the article numbers in the tables below.

Controllers

Product Article numbers for circuit diagrams


Circuit diagram - IRC5 3HAC024480-011
Circuit diagram - Euromap 67, design 14 3HAC024120-005
Circuit diagram - Spot welding cabinet 3HAC057185-001

Manipulators

Product Article numbers for circuit diagrams


Circuit diagram - IRB 120 3HAC031408-003
Circuit diagram - IRB 140 type C 3HAC6816-3
Circuit diagram - IRB 260 3HAC025611-001
Circuit diagram - IRB 360 3HAC028647-009
Circuit diagram - IRB 460 3HAC036446-005
Circuit diagram - IRB 660 3HAC025691-001
Circuit diagram - IRB 760 3HAC025691-001
Circuit diagram - IRB 1200 3HAC046307-003
Circuit diagram - IRB 1410 3HAC2800-3
Circuit diagram - IRB 1600/1660 3HAC021351-003
Circuit diagram - IRB 1520 3HAC039498-007
Circuit diagram - IRB 2400 3HAC6670-3
Circuit diagram - IRB 2600 3HAC029570-007
Circuit diagram - IRB 4400/4450S 3HAC9821-1
Circuit diagram - IRB 4600 3HAC029038-003
Circuit diagram - IRB 6620 3HAC025090-001
Circuit diagram - IRB 6620 / IRB 6620LX 3HAC025090-001
Circuit diagram - IRB 6640 3HAC025744-001
Circuit diagram - IRB 6650S 3HAC13347-1
3HAC025744-001
Circuit diagram - IRB 6660 3HAC025744-001
3HAC029940-001
Circuit diagram - IRB 6700 / IRB 6790 3HAC043446-005

Continues on next page


Product manual - IRC5 337
3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
8 Circuit diagrams
8.1 Circuit diagrams
Continued

Product Article numbers for circuit diagrams


Circuit diagram - IRB 7600 3HAC13347-1
3HAC025744-001
Circuit diagram - IRB 14000 3HAC050778-003
Circuit diagram - IRB 910SC 3HAC056159-002

338 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
Index

Index E
earth fault breaker, 205
Electronic Position Switches, 149, 259
A emergency stop, 27, 206
additional drive module, 182
emergency stops, 29
additional drive unit, 112
enabling device, 30, 132
allergenic material, 34
function test, 208
aluminum
EN ISO 13849-1, 18, 20
disposal, 306
environmental information, 306
ARU bleeder, 288
EPS board, 149, 259
assessment of hazards and risks, 34
ESD
automatic fuse, 215
damage elimination, 47
automatic mode, 33
sensitive equipment, 47
automatic stop
esd elimination, 41, 47
function test, 211
EtherNet/IP, 122
auto stop jumper, 77
expansion board, replace, 240
B external enabling device, 132
backup energy bank, repair, 226 external operator’s panel, 128
Base external safety relay, 76
Scalable, 122
batteries
F
fan sensor, 186, 279
disposal, 306
fieldbus adapter, replace, 243
bleeder, 286
fire extinguishing, 35
bolt pattern, 49
FlexPendant
brake contactor, 210
connecting, 86
brake resistor bleeder, 286
connecting in operation, 88
brominated flame retardants
disconnecting, 88
disposal, 306
hot plug, 88
C jumper plug, 88
cabinet lock, 35 function tests, 205
cables, 73
carbon dioxide extinguisher, 35
G
general stop, 212
category 0 stop, 27
category 1 stop, 27 H
category 3, 18 hanging
CCF, 18 installed hanging, 34
cleaning of the controller, 200 hazard levels, 22
cleaning the FlexPendant, 203 hazardous material, 306
climbing on robot, 38 Heat exchange unit and fan, repair, 228
Common Cause Failures, 18 height
Configuration of the drive system, 112 installed at a height, 34
connecting a USB memory, 116 hold-to-run, 30
connection hot plug, 88
FlexPendant, 86 hot surfaces, 38
manipulator cables, 73 HRA, 34
contactor auxilary blocks, 85
contactor interface board, repair, 273 I
controller I/O device, 122
symbols, 24 I/O signals, 75
copper I/O units and gateways, repair, 224
disposal, 306 Inspection of controller, 195
installation activities, 43
D Installation of I/O, Gateways and encoder units, 137
DC, 18 installation space, 48
Diagnostic Coverage, 18 integrator responsibility, 34
disposal of storage media, 305 IP class, 46
Drive functions, 111 ISO 13849-1, 18
drive modules, 100
drive system, 112 J
drive system fan, repair, 276 jumper plug, 88
drive system fan sensor, 186, 279
drive unit, 112, 254 K
DSQC1015, 163, 267 key of the mode switch, 37

Product manual - IRC5 339


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
Index

L definition, 27
labels protective wear, 21
controller, 24
lead R
disposal, 306 rated current, 68
lifting device, 44 rated voltage, 68
limitation of liability, 17 recovering from emergency stops, 29
limit switch, 214 rectifiers, 112
Lithium recycling, 306
disposal, 306 reduced speed control
lock and tag, 35 function test, 216
regional regulations, 34
M replacements, report, 217
main drive unit, 112 replacing
Main Drive Unit, 254 contactor interface board, 273
manipulator cables, 73 expansion board, 240
manual full speed mode, 31 fieldbus adapter, 243
manual high speed mode, 31 PCIexpress boards, 236
manual mode, 31 SD-card memory, 251
manual reduced speed, 31 report replacements, 217
MDU bleeder, 288 required performance level, PLr, 18
memory, 251 responsibility and validity, 17
memory functions, 115 risk of burns, 38
mode switch, 207 rubber
mode switch key, 37 disposal, 306
motor contactors, 209
MOTORS ON/MOTORS OFF, 84 S
MOTORS ON/MOTORS OFF circuit, 78 safeguarding, 27
MTTFD, 18–19 safeguard mechanisms
MultiMove, 182 automatic mode, 33
manual mode, 31
N SafeMove, 163, 236, 267
national regulations, 34 safety
network security, 16 ESD, 47
fire extinguishing, 35
O signals, 22
operating conditions, 45 signals in manual, 22
operating mode stop functions, 27
automatic mode, 33 symbols, 22
manual full speed mode, 31 symbols on controller, 24
manual mode, 31 safety controller, 149, 259
manual reduced speed, 31 safety devices, 35
operator’s panel, 128 safety module, 163, 236
options Safety module, 267
hot plug button, 88 safety signals, 74
original spare parts, 17 in manual, 22
safety standards, 310
P Scalable
panel board, repair, 218 Base, 122
PCIexpress boards, replace, 236 Scalable I/O, 122
pedestal SCCR, 67
installed on pedestal, 34 SD-card memory, replace, 251
performance level, PL, 18 sensor, drive system fan, 186, 279
personnel servo disconnect, 106
requirements, 21 shielded cables, 75
PFHD, 20 short circuit current rating, 67
PL, performance level, 18 signal cables, 75
plastic signals
disposal, 306 safety, 22
Plug & Produce, 122 standards, 310
Power supply ANSI, 310
Connecting power supply to the controller, 67 CAN, 310
PPE, 21 EN IEC, 310
product standards, 310 EN ISO, 310
protection class, 46 steel
protective equipment, 21 disposal, 306
protective stop stop category 0, 27

340 Product manual - IRC5


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
Index

stop category 1, 27 transformer, 68


stops troubleshooting
overview, 27 safety, 39
storage conditions, 45
superior stop, 213 U
symbols upcycling, 306
safety, 22 USB ports, 116
system integrator requirements, 34 users
requirements, 21
T
temperature, 45 V
temp sensor, drive system fan, 186, 279 validity and responsibility, 17
three-position enabling device, 30
function test, 208 W
tightening torque, 313 weight, 46
wrist strap, 41, 47

Product manual - IRC5 341


3HAC047136-001 Revision: W
© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.
ABB AB
Robotics & Discrete Automation
S-721 68 VÄSTERÅS, Sweden
Telephone +46 (0) 21 344 400

ABB AS
Robotics & Discrete Automation
Nordlysvegen 7, N-4340 BRYNE, Norway
Box 265, N-4349 BRYNE, Norway
Telephone: +47 22 87 2000

ABB Engineering (Shanghai) Ltd.


Robotics & Discrete Automation
No. 4528 Kangxin Highway
PuDong District
SHANGHAI 201319, China
Telephone: +86 21 6105 6666

ABB Inc.
Robotics & Discrete Automation
1250 Brown Road
Auburn Hills, MI 48326
USA
Telephone: +1 248 391 9000

abb.com/robotics
3HAC047136-001, Rev W, en

© Copyright 2004-2022 ABB. All rights reserved.


Specifications subject to change without notice.

You might also like